Databook12-9213 RVP-4 Section 8 To 14

8
Interline Systems B.V.
Calibration Certificate
Item
07
14
Material
Make
Type
Fast loop flowmeter

Flow meter
Brooks
Brooks
MT-3809
MT-1355
07
Brooks
Fast loop flowmeter

MT-3809
14
Brooks
Flow meter
MT-1355
Tube Fittings - Installation Instructions
Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings
59
Installation Instructions
Swagelok Tube Fittings Up to 1 in./25 mm
These instructions apply both to traditional fittings and to fittings with the advanced back-ferrule geometry.
Fully insert the tubing into the

fitting and against the shoulder;
rotate the nut finger-tight.
Mark the nut at the 6 oclock

position.
While holding the fitting body

steady, tighten the nut one and
one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock
position.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and
4 mm tube fittings, tighten the nut
three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock
position
Installation in High-Pressure Applications and High Safety-Factor Systems

1. Fully insert the tubing into the fitting and against the
shoulder; rotate the nut finger-tight.
2. Due to the variations of tubing diameters, a common
starting point is desirable. Therefore, tighten the nut until
the tubing will not turn by hand or move axially in the fitting.
3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position.

4. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and
one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings,
tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position.
Swagelok Tube Fittings Over 1 in./25 mm

1. Preswage the ferrules onto the tubing.
2. Tighten nut one-half turn past finger-tight after the ferrules are preswaged.
ReassemblyAll Sizes
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok tube fittings many times.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1. Insert tubing with preswaged ferrules into the fitting body

until the front ferrule seats (Fig. 1).
2. Rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up
position; at this point, a significant increase in resistance
will be encountered.
3. Tighten slightly with a wrench (Fig. 2).

Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with
reassembled fittings.
Caps and Plugs

Caps
Plugs
See Swagelok tube

fitting installation and
reassembly, above.
While holding fitting body steady, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from the
finger-tight position.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the plug one-eighth turn.
For over 1 in. and over 25 mm tube fittings, tighten the plug one-quarter turn.
Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok plugs many times. Make subsequent
connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
60
Port Connectors
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Machined Ferrule End
Fig. 3
Tube Adapter End
While holding fitting body steady, tighten the port connector

one-quarter turn from the finger-tight position.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten
the port connector one-eighth turn.
For over 1 in. and over 25 mm tube fittings, tighten the port
connector one-quarter turn.
Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok port
connectors many times. Make subsequent connections by
slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
1. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting.

Make sure that the tube adapter rests firmly on the
shoulder of the tube fitting body and that the nut is
finger-tight (Fig. 3).
2. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position.
3. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and
one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings,
tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position.
Reassembly
See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 59.
Tube Adapters
1. Install the end opposite the tube
adapter end (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
Female pipe port

on existing equipment
Fig. 2
2. Insert the tube adapter into the

Swagelok tube fitting. Make sure
that the tube adapter rests firmly
on the shoulder of the tube fitting
body and that the nut is finger-tight
(Fig. 2).
3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock
position.
4. While holding fitting body steady,

tighten the nut one and onequarter turns to the 9 oclock
position.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and
position.
Reassembly
See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly,
page 59.
O-Seal Male Connectors

1. Turn the O-seal connector into the female end until it is finger-tight.
2. Tighten the O-seal connector until it makes metal-to-metal contact with the
face of the female end.
3. Tighten slightly with a wrench.
Positionable Elbows and Tees

1. Turn the positionable end into the female fitting until the metal backup washer
contacts the face of the fitting.
2. Turn the positionable end out of the female fitting (not more than one turn) until
the Swagelok tube fitting end is positioned properly.
Lock nut
Backup
washer
3. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the lock nut until the metal backup
washer contacts the face of the fitting.
61
Weld Fittings
Welding Precautions for Swagelok Tube Fittings with Weld End Connections
1. Remove the nut and ferrules.
5. Complete the weld.
2. Turn a Swagelok tube fitting plug or another nut onto the

fitting so that it is finger-tight. This protects the threads
and sealing components.
6. Remove the plug or nut and replace the nut and ferrules.
3. Provide a suitable heat sink to dissipate the heat.

4. Tack weld at four positions 90 apart to hold the fitting in
place and to ensure alignment and concentricity of the
components.
Caution: When welding carbon steel fittings, the heat

often removes the protective oil from the threads.
It is important to apply another lubricant, such as
Goop thread lubricant.
Depth Marking Tool

Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred

tubing into the depth marking
tool (DMT) until the tubing is fully
bottomed into the tool. Using a
pen or pencil, mark the tubing at
the top of the DMT (Fig. 1).
3. While holding the fitting body

steady, follow Swagelok tube
fitting installation instructions,
page 59.
2. Remove the tubing from the DMT

and insert it into the Swagelok
fitting until it is bottomed inside the
fitting body (Fig. 2). If any portion of
the mark on the tubing can be seen
above the fitting nut, the tubing is
not fully bottomed inside the fitting.
Preswaging Tool
Fig. 1
1. Install the Swagelok nut and

ferrules onto the preswaging tool.
2. Insert tubing into the preswaging
tool.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
3. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly

on the shoulder of the preswaging
tool body and that the nut is fingertight.
6. Loosen the nut.

7. Remove the tubing with preswaged
ferrules from the preswaging tool.
If the tubing sticks in the
preswaging tool, remove the tubing
by gently rocking it back and forth.
Do not turn the tubing (Fig. 2).
4. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock

position.
8. Insert tubing with preswaged

ferrules into the fitting body until
the front ferrule seats.
5. While holding the preswaging tool

steady, tighten the nut one and
one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock
position.
9. Rotate the nut with a wrench to the

previously pulled-up position; at
this point, a significant increase in
resistance will be encountered.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and

position (Fig. 1).
10. Tighten slightly with a wrench

(Fig. 3)
Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection
gauge with fittings that were assembled
using the preswaging tool.
10
Test Record 24h
kPa
4 5 5 2 0 6 4 2 0 9 9 0 1 0 0 1 2 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 7 7 8 8 8 1 3 4 7
:2 :0 :1 :2 :3 :3 :4 :5 :0 :0 :1 :3 :4 :5 :0 :1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :0 :1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :0 :1 :2 :3 :5 :0 :1 :2
16 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 0 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 6 0 7
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1
7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. .7. 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
.
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
55.800
56.000
56.200
56.400
56.600
56.800
57.000
57.200
57.400
57.600
57.800
RVP 10.07.062 @ 45C
Value
Date&Time
21.7.10 16:24
21.7.10 17:05
21.7.10 17:12
21.7.10 17:20
21.7.10 17:27
21.7.10 17:35
21.7.10 17:43
21.7.10 17:50
21.7.10 17:58
21.7.10 18:05
21.7.10 18:13
21.7.10 18:21
21.7.10 18:29
21.7.10 18:37
21.7.10 18:45
21.7.10 18:52
21.7.10 19:00
21.7.10 19:07
21.7.10 19:15
21.7.10 19:23
21.7.10 19:30
21.7.10 19:37
21.7.10 19:45
21.7.10 19:52
21.7.10 20:00
21.7.10 20:07
21.7.10 20:14
21.7.10 20:22
21.7.10 20:30
21.7.10 20:37
21.7.10 20:45
21.7.10 20:53
21.7.10 21:00
21.7.10 21:08
21.7.10 21:15
21.7.10 21:23
21.7.10 21:30
21.7.10 21:39
21.7.10 21:47
21.7.10 21:54
21.7.10 22:01
21.7.10 22:08
21.7.10 22:16
21.7.10 22:22
21.7.10 22:29
21.7.10 22:36
21.7.10 22:44
21.7.10 22:52
21.7.10 22:59
21.7.10 23:07
21.7.10 23:14
21.7.10 23:22
21.7.10 23:28
21.7.10 23:36
21.7.10 23:44
Stream
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Type
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
Value
57.600
57.000
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.900
56.900
56.700
57.000
56.800
56.700
56.900
56.800
56.700
57.000
56.700
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.600
56.600
56.600
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.600
56.500
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.600
56.800
56.700
56.700
56.900
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.600
56.700
56.900
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.900
56.700
Unit
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
T_Cell
45.00
45.04
45.03
45.04
45.03
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.02
45.03
45.02
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
44.99
44.99
44.98
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
44.99
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.01
44.99
44.99
44.99
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
44.98
44.99
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
Unit
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
21.7.10 23:51
21.7.10 23:58
22.7.10 0:06
22.7.10 0:15
22.7.10 0:22
22.7.10 0:29
22.7.10 0:36
22.7.10 0:43
22.7.10 0:52
22.7.10 0:59
22.7.10 1:07
22.7.10 1:14
22.7.10 1:21
22.7.10 1:29
22.7.10 1:37
22.7.10 1:45
22.7.10 1:52
22.7.10 2:00
22.7.10 2:07
22.7.10 2:15
22.7.10 2:22
22.7.10 2:30
22.7.10 2:38
22.7.10 2:46
22.7.10 2:54
22.7.10 3:02
22.7.10 3:09
22.7.10 3:16
22.7.10 3:24
22.7.10 3:31
22.7.10 3:39
22.7.10 3:47
22.7.10 3:55
22.7.10 4:04
22.7.10 4:11
22.7.10 4:19
22.7.10 4:27
22.7.10 4:35
22.7.10 4:43
22.7.10 4:51
22.7.10 4:59
22.7.10 5:07
22.7.10 5:15
22.7.10 5:22
22.7.10 5:30
22.7.10 5:38
22.7.10 5:46
22.7.10 5:54
22.7.10 6:01
22.7.10 6:10
22.7.10 6:18
22.7.10 6:25
22.7.10 6:33
22.7.10 6:41
22.7.10 6:49
22.7.10 6:55
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.600
56.900
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.900
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.900
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.700
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.01
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
22.7.10 7:03
22.7.10 7:11
22.7.10 7:18
22.7.10 7:26
22.7.10 7:34
22.7.10 7:42
22.7.10 7:50
22.7.10 7:57
22.7.10 8:05
22.7.10 8:13
22.7.10 8:21
22.7.10 8:29
22.7.10 8:37
22.7.10 8:43
22.7.10 8:52
22.7.10 9:00
22.7.10 9:08
22.7.10 9:16
22.7.10 9:24
22.7.10 9:31
22.7.10 9:40
22.7.10 9:47
22.7.10 9:55
22.7.10 10:03
22.7.10 10:11
22.7.10 10:19
22.7.10 10:27
22.7.10 10:35
22.7.10 10:44
22.7.10 10:52
22.7.10 11:00
22.7.10 11:06
22.7.10 11:14
22.7.10 11:22
22.7.10 11:30
22.7.10 11:38
22.7.10 11:46
22.7.10 11:54
22.7.10 12:02
22.7.10 12:10
22.7.10 12:18
22.7.10 12:26
22.7.10 12:34
22.7.10 12:41
22.7.10 12:48
22.7.10 12:56
22.7.10 13:03
22.7.10 13:12
22.7.10 13:20
22.7.10 13:28
22.7.10 13:35
22.7.10 13:43
22.7.10 13:51
22.7.10 13:58
22.7.10 14:06
22.7.10 14:14
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
56.800
56.800
56.600
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.800
56.900
56.700
56.800
56.800
56.700
56.900
56.800
56.700
56.900
56.800
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.900
56.900
56.700
56.900
56.700
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.700
56.700
56.800
56.600
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.600
56.900
56.800
56.800
56.800
56.700
56.800
56.700
56.700
56.900
56.800
56.900
56.800
56.800
56.900
56.700
56.800
56.900
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
45.01
45.01
44.99
45.00
44.99
44.99
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.02
45.01
45.02
45.00
45.02
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.02
45.02
45.01
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
22.7.10 14:22
22.7.10 14:31
22.7.10 14:38
22.7.10 14:46
22.7.10 14:54
22.7.10 15:01
22.7.10 15:10
22.7.10 15:18
22.7.10 15:26
22.7.10 15:34
22.7.10 15:42
22.7.10 15:50
22.7.10 15:58
22.7.10 16:05
22.7.10 16:12
22.7.10 16:20
22.7.10 16:29
22.7.10 16:37
22.7.10 16:45
22.7.10 16:53
22.7.10 17:00
22.7.10 17:08
22.7.10 17:16
22.7.10 17:22
22.7.10 17:31
22.7.10 17:39
22.7.10 17:47
22.7.10 17:55
22.7.10 18:02
22.7.10 18:11
22.7.10 18:19
22.7.10 18:27
22.7.10 18:34
22.7.10 18:42
22.7.10 18:50
22.7.10 18:58
22.7.10 19:06
22.7.10 19:14
22.7.10 19:22
22.7.10 19:30
22.7.10 19:38
22.7.10 19:46
22.7.10 19:54
22.7.10 20:01
22.7.10 20:08
22.7.10 20:16
22.7.10 20:24
22.7.10 20:32
22.7.10 20:40
22.7.10 20:47
22.7.10 20:55
22.7.10 21:02
22.7.10 21:10
22.7.10 21:18
22.7.10 21:25
22.7.10 21:34
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.700
56.900
57.000
57.000
56.900
57.000
56.800
57.000
56.800
56.700
57.000
56.900
56.900
57.000
56.800
57.000
56.900
56.900
57.000
57.000
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
57.000
56.800
57.000
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.700
56.900
57.000
57.000
56.800
57.000
57.000
56.700
56.900
57.000
56.800
56.900
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.02
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
44.99
45.00
44.99
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
22.7.10 21:41
22.7.10 21:49
22.7.10 21:57
22.7.10 22:05
22.7.10 22:12
22.7.10 22:20
22.7.10 22:28
22.7.10 22:35
22.7.10 22:43
22.7.10 22:51
22.7.10 22:59
22.7.10 23:07
22.7.10 23:15
22.7.10 23:23
22.7.10 23:32
22.7.10 23:40
22.7.10 23:47
22.7.10 23:55
23.7.10 0:03
23.7.10 0:10
23.7.10 0:18
23.7.10 0:25
23.7.10 0:32
23.7.10 0:40
23.7.10 0:48
23.7.10 0:56
23.7.10 1:04
23.7.10 1:12
23.7.10 1:20
23.7.10 1:28
23.7.10 1:35
23.7.10 1:43
23.7.10 1:51
23.7.10 1:58
23.7.10 2:06
23.7.10 2:14
23.7.10 2:23
23.7.10 2:30
23.7.10 2:38
23.7.10 2:46
23.7.10 2:54
23.7.10 3:02
23.7.10 3:10
23.7.10 3:18
23.7.10 3:27
23.7.10 3:34
23.7.10 3:43
23.7.10 3:51
23.7.10 3:58
23.7.10 4:07
23.7.10 4:15
23.7.10 4:23
23.7.10 4:31
23.7.10 4:40
23.7.10 4:47
23.7.10 4:55
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
56.700
56.900
57.000
56.900
57.000
57.000
57.100
56.800
57.000
56.900
57.000
56.900
56.900
57.100
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.800
56.900
56.700
57.000
56.800
56.800
56.800
57.000
56.900
56.900
57.000
56.900
57.000
56.700
57.000
56.900
56.800
56.900
57.000
56.900
57.000
56.900
56.900
56.900
57.000
56.900
56.900
57.000
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.900
57.000
57.000
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.02
45.01
45.01
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
23.7.10 5:03
23.7.10 5:10
23.7.10 5:19
23.7.10 5:26
23.7.10 5:35
23.7.10 5:43
23.7.10 5:50
23.7.10 5:58
23.7.10 6:06
23.7.10 6:14
23.7.10 6:22
23.7.10 6:31
23.7.10 6:38
23.7.10 6:47
23.7.10 6:55
23.7.10 7:03
23.7.10 7:10
23.7.10 7:18
23.7.10 7:27
23.7.10 7:35
23.7.10 7:43
23.7.10 7:50
23.7.10 7:57
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
Stabil Crude
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
TVPE
56.900
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.900
56.900
56.900
57.000
57.000
56.800
56.900
56.900
56.800
57.000
57.000
56.800
57.000
56.900
57.000
56.900
56.900
56.800
56.700
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
kPa
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
44.99
44.99
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
45.01
45.01
45.00
45.01
45.00
45.00
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
11
Factory Acceptance Test
12
Components Description
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
21
22
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
34
35
36
Material
Make
Type
Ball valve
Fast loop pump
Pump motor
Relief valve
Ball valve
Fast loop filter
Fast loop flowmeter
Cooler
Pressure regulator
Pressure indicator
Relief valve
Coalescer filter
Flow meter
Flow meter
Ball valve
Temperature regulator
Flow indicator
Ball valve
Relief valve
Junction box (analog)
Power switch analyser
Junction box (digital)
Light switch
Lighting
Manual motor starter
Ball valve
Flow meter
Swagelok
Verdergear
Koncar
Swagelok
Swagelok
Classic
Brooks
Sentry
Swagelok
IFG de Wit
Swagelok
E.I.F.
ABB
Brooks
Swagelok
Danfoss
Kytl
Oliver
Swagelok
Rose
Ceag
Rose
Ceag
Ceag
Ceag
Kitz
ABB
SS-45S8
VG150.8R
5AT71A-2 IMB34
SS-8CPA2-50
SS-43GS4
SF215.421/25.64S100V
MT-3809
TSF4225
KPR1ERL422A20000
91/63.0-4
SS-4CPA2-50
3S1NL1 SEC HV-6H
A6121B083INA2BAS
GT-1355
SS-43GS4
AVTA10
A-5A-A
B6FX50S/PMHB
SS-4CPA2-50
35151508
GHG 261 0005 R0009
35202012
GHG 273 2000 R0018
eLLK92018/18
GHG 635 1102 R0106
AK-UTKM 1/2"
A6121C023INA2BAS
(see item 01)
(see item 04)
(see item 01)
(see item 04)
(see item 25)
(see item 13)
01
Swagelok
Ball valve
SS-45S8
www.swagelok.com
O ne -Pie ce Instr ume ntation Ball Valve s
40 G Se r ie s a nd 40 Se r ie s
On-off, switching, and crossover flow paths
Working pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar)
Temperatures from 65 to 300F (53 to 148C)
Environmental and heated-process applications
1/16 to 3/4 in. and 3 to 12 mm end connections
Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series
Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves
Contents
Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . 2
Important Information About
Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Swagelok one-piece instrumentation ball valves have been

well accepted and widely used in a variety of industries for
many years.
Both the original Swagelok 40 series and the newer 40G
series valves accommodate a wide range of actuator, flow
path, and handle options, as well as offer ease of packing
adjustment while inline.
40G Series and 40 Series Comparison

Valve Series
Flow Data at 70F (20C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Feature
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Valve
Body
Materials
Stainless steel
Packing
Materials
Modified PTFE
or UHMWPE
Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

On-Off (2-Way) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Switching (3-Way) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Switching (5-Way and 7-Way) Valves (40 Series) . . . 10
Crossover (4-Way and 6-Way) Valves (40 Series) . . . 11
Handle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Vent Port and Stem Extension Options . . . . . . . . . . 14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
41G, 42G, 43G
Working
Pressure
psig (bar)
Temperature
Rating
F (C)
Flow
Coefficients
(Cv)
Options for Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Brass,
alloy 400
PTFE
65 to 300
50 to 150
(53 to 148)
(10 to 65)
0.08 to 2.4
End
Connection
Sizes
Flow
Patterns
44, 45
Stainless steel,
brass,
alloy 400
Up to 3000 (206), depending on valve size.

See page 5.
0.05 to 2.4
1/16 to 3/8 in.;

3 to 8 mm
Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . 18
41, 42, 43
On-off (2-way);
switching
(3-way)
Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
On-off (2-way);
switching
(3-way, 5-way
and 7-way);
crossover
(4-way and
6-way)
1.5 to 12
3/8 to 3/4 in.;
8 to 12 mm
On-off (2-way);
switching
(3-way and
5way);
crossover
(4-way)
Live-loaded PFA (all sizes) and UHMWPE (41, 42, and 43 series sizes)
Process Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
packing are available to extend the low-temperature rating to 65F

(53C). See the Swagelok Live-Loaded 40Series Ball Valves for LowTemperature Service catalog, MS02109.
Flow Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Ordering Multiple Options and Accessories . . . . . . . 27
Important Information About Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves

Swagelok ball valves are
designed to be used in a fully

open or fully closed position.
Valves that have not been cycled

for a period of time may have a
higher initial actuation torque.
Packing adjustment may be
required during the service life

of the valve to prevent leakage.
Service instructions are shipped with
each 40G series and 40 series valve.

40G and 40 series valves are adjusted
for factory testing with nitrogen at

1000psig (69 bar), or the rated pressure
if lower than 1000 psig (69bar). Packing
must be readjusted for service at higher
than test pressure. See page 22 for
optional production tests.
Instrumentation ball valves exposed
to dynamic temperature conditions

before installation may lose their initial
packing load. Packing adjustment
may be needed.
41G and 42G series valves require
an 8 mm deep-well socket and 43G

series valves require a 9 mm deepwell socket to adjust the packing bolt.
41 and 42 series valves require a
3/8in. open-ended wrench; 44 series

valves require a 1/2in. open-ended
wrench; and 45 series valves require
a 5/8in. open-ended wrench to
adjust the packing bolt.
43 series valves require an adapter
to adjust the packing bolt. Ordering

number: MS-WK-43
Features
40G Series
Directional handle
with double-flat stem
indicates position of orifice.
Top-loaded,
live-loaded design
reduces need for packing
adjustment
allows adjustment with the
valve in-line
compensates for wear
improves thermal cycle
performance.
Single-piece, patent-pending
encapsulated packing
is constructed of modified PTFE
reduces potential leak points
does not require system
pressure to seal
has virtually no dead space
allows bidirectional flow
is easily cleaned and purged.
Balanced-trunnion,
patent-pending design
supports packing, reducing the need for packing adjustment
reduces packing volume, minimizing thermal effects
minimizes packing extrusion
improves thermal cycle performance.
One-piece ball stem

ensures alignment of
stem and orifice.
40 Series
Directional handle
indicates position of orifice.
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
Top-loaded design
allows adjustment with
the valve in-line.
Capsule seat packing

is constructed of PTFE
does not require system
pressure to make a seal
has virtually no dead space
allows bidirectional flow
is easily cleaned and purged.
One-piece ball stem

ensures alignment of
stem and orifice.
Drop-in Replacement
Swagelok 41G, 42G, and 43G series valves easily replace original
stainless steel 41, 42, and 43 series valves.
Equivalent dimensions
Comparable materials of construction
Couplings must be replaced on actuated valves. See pages 17 and 20.

Swagelok 44 and 45 series valves remain available in stainless steel; the
full range of 40 series sizes is available in brass and alloy 400.
Materials of Construction
40G Series
Component
1 Handle
2
Stainless Steel Valve Body Material
Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Nylon with
powdered metal 300 series SS insert
S17400/A564
2 Set screw
3 Packing bolt
Powdered metal 300 series SS
4 Springs
5 Gland
S17700/A693
Powdered metal 300 series SS
6 Ball stem
316 SS/A276
Modified PTFE/D1710 type 1, Grade 1, Class B
or UHMWPE/D4020
7 Packing
8 Side rings
9 Side discs
10 Panel nut
Powdered metal
300 series SS/B783
Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783
11 Body
316 SS/A276 and A479
Wetted lubricant
Nonwetted
lubricant
Silicone-based
Molybdenum disulfide
with hydrocarbon binder coating
8
8
7
9
10
Wetted components listed in italics.

41G and 42G series: 8 springs; 43G series: 6 springs.
B783 specification not available on 41G and 42G series; standard on
43Gseries.
Bodies with VCO end connections and modified PTFE packing have
fluorocarbon FKM O-rings; bodies with with VCO end connections and
UHMWPE packing have ethylene propylene Orings.
11
40 Series
Valve Body Materials
1
2
3
Component
43 series
1 Handle
3 Packing bolt
4
5
4 Upper gland
Brass CDA 360/B16
Alloy 400/B164
316 SS/A240
41, 42, 45 series:

brass 260/B36;
43, 44 series:
316 SS/A240
Alloy 400/B127
PTFE/D1710
Brass CDA 360/B16
8 Ball stem
316 SS/A276
Brass CDA 360/B16
Alloy 400/B164
9 Side rings
Fluorocarbon-coated
powdered metal
300series SS/B783
Fluorocarbon-coated
brass
powdered metal
Fluorocarbon-coated
alloy 400
powdered metal
10 Side discs
9
11
10
Powdered metal
300series SS or
316SS/A276, A479
7 Upper packing
10
9
S17400 SS/A564
Powdered metal
300series SS
6 Lower gland
11 Lower packing
12 Panel nut
12
13
Alloy 400
Nylon with brass insert
5 Bushing
Brass
2 Set screw
41, 42,
44, 45
series
Stainless Steel
13 Body
Wetted lubricant
Nonwetted
lubricant
Alloy 400/B164
PTFE/D1710
PTFE/D1710
Powdered metal
Powdered metal
Brass CDA 360/B16
300series SS/B783
300series SS/B783
316 SS/
Brass CDA 360/B16
Alloy 400/B164
A276, A479
41, 42, 43 series: silicone-based;
44, 45 series: silicone- and fluorinated-based
Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating

4-way, 5-way, 6-way, and 7-way valves contain stainless steel stem, rings, and discs.
Bodies with VCO end connections have fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Pressure-Temperature Ratings
The 40G series valve is designed for thermal cycling in both environmental and heated-process applications.
Ratings shown below apply to on-off (2-way) and switching (3-way) valves. Ratings for switching (5-way and 7-way) and
crossover (4-way and 6-way) valves are shown on page 10 and 11, respectively.
Series
40G
Packing Material
Valve Size
(Configuration)
40
Modified PTFE
UHMWPE
41G, 42G
41G, 42G
(Straight, Angle,
3-Way);
43G (Angle,
3Way)
(Straight, Angle,
3-Way);
43G (Angle,
3Way)
Temperature F (C)
65 (53) to 50 (10)
50 (10) to 150 (65)
200 (93)
250 (121)

300 (148)
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
(172)
(172)
(172)
(172)
(172)
43G
(Straight)
3000
3000
2800
2650
2500
(206)
(206)
(193)
(182)
(172)
PTFE
43G
(Straight)
41, 42 (Straight,
Angle, 3-Way);
43 (Angle,
3Way);
44, 45 (Straight)
Working Pressure, psig (bar)
2500 (172)
3000 (206)
2500 (172)
2500 (172)
3000 (206)
43
44, 45
(Straight)
(Angle, 3Way)
3000 (206)
1500 (103)
Pressure ratings for valves with Swagelok tube fitting ends may be lower due to the tubing pressure rating. See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
Live-loaded PFA (all sizes) and UHMWPE (41, 42, and 43 series sizes) packing are available to extend the low-temperature rating to 65F (53C). See the
Swagelok Live-Loaded 40Series Ball Valves for Low-Temperature Service catalog, MS02109.
Flow Data at 70F (20C)
Testing
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p), psi (bar)

Flow
Coefficient
(Cv)
10 (0.68)
50 (3.4)
100 (6.8)
Air Flow
std ft3/min (std L/min)
10 (0.68)
50 (3.4)
100 (6.8)
Water Flow
U. S. gal/min (std L/min)
Every 40G series and 40 series ball

valve is factory tested with nitrogen at
1000 psig (69bar) or at its maximum
rated pressure if less than 1000 psig
(69 bar). Seat tests have a maximum
allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min.
0.05
0.6 (16)
1.5 (42)
2.6 (73)
0.1 (0.3)
0.3 (1.1)
0.5 (1.8)
0.06
0.7 (19)
1.8 (50)
3.2 (90)
0.2 (0.7)
0.4 (1.5)
0.6 (2.2)
0.07
0.8 (22)
2.1 (59)
3.7 (100)
0.2 (0.7)
0.5 (1.8)
0.7 (2.6)
Cleaning and Packaging
0.08
0.9 (25)
2.4 (67)
4.3 (120)
0.3 (1.1)
0.6 (2.2)
0.8 (3.0)
0.10
1.1 (31)
3.0 (84)
5.3 (150)
0.3 (1.1)
0.7 (2.6)
1.0 (3.7)
0.15
1.7 (48)
4.5 (120)
8.0 (220)
0.4 (1.5)
1.0 (3.7)
1.5 (5.6)
0.20
2.3 (65)
6.0 (160)
11 (310)
0.6 (2.2)
1.4 (5.2)
2.0 (7.5)
All 40G series and 40 series valves are

cleaned in accordance with Swagelok
Standard Cleaning and Packaging
(SC10), MS0662.
0.30
3.4 (96)
9.0 (250)
16 (450)
0.9 (3.4)
2.1 (7.9)
3.0 (11)
0.35
4.0 (110)
10 (280)
19 (530)
1.1 (4.1)
2.4 (9.0)
3.5 (13)
0.50
5.6 (150)
15 (420)
27 (760)
1.6 (6.0)
3.5 (13)
5.0 (18)
0.60
6.8 (190)
18 (500)
32 (900)
1.9 (7.1)
4.2 (15)
6.0 (22)
0.70
7.9 (220)
21 (590)
37 (1000)
2.2 (8.3)
4.9 (18)
7.0 (26)
0.75
8.5 (240)
22 (620)
40 (1100)
2.3 (8.7)
5.3 (20)
7.5 (28)
0.80
9.0 (250)
24 (670)
42 (1100)
2.5 (9.4)
5.6 (21)
8.0 (30)
0.90
10 (280)
27 (760)
48 (1300)
2.8 (10)
6.4 (24)
9.0 (34)
1.2
14 (390)
36 (1000)
64 (1800)
3.8 (14)
8.5 (32)
12 (45)
1.4
16 (450)
42 (1100)
74 (2000)
4.4 (16)
9.9 (37)
14 (52)
1.5
17 (480)
45 (1200)
80 (2200)
4.7 (17)
11 (41)
15 (56)
1.6
18 (500)
48 (1300)
85 (2400)
5.0 (18)
11 (41)
16 (60)
1.7
19 (530)
51 (1400)
90 (2500)
5.3 (20)
12 (45)
17 (64)
2.0
22 (620)
60 (1600)
100 (2800)
6.3 (23)
14 (52)
20 (75)
2.4
27 (760)
72 (2000)
120 (3300)
7.6 (28)
17 (64)
24 (90)
2.6
29 (820)
78 (2200)
140 (3900)
8.2 (31)
18 (68)
26 (98)
3.0
34 (960)
90 (2500)
160 (4500)
9.5 (35)
21 (79)
30 (110)
3.5
39 (1100)
100 (2800)
180 (5000)
11 (41)
25 (94)
35 (130)
3.8
43 (1200)
110 (3100)
200 (5600)
12 (45)
27 (100)
38 (140)
4.6
52 (1400)
140 (3900)
240 (6700)
15 (56)
33 (120)
46 (170)
6.0
68 (1900)
180 (5000)
320 (9000)
19 (71)
42 (150)
60 (220)
6.3
71 (2000)
190 (5300)
330 (9300)
20 (75)
45 (170)
63 (230)
6.4
72 (2000)
190 (5300)
340 (9600)
20 (75)
45 (170)
64 (240)
38 (140)
85 (320)
120 (450)
12
130 (3600)
360 (10 000) 640 (18 000)
Special cleaning and packaging in

accordance with Swagelok Special
Cleaning and Packaging (SC11),
MS0663, to ensure compliance with
product cleanliness requirements stated
in ASTM G93 Level C, is available as an
option. See Process Options, page22.
On-Off (2-Way) Valves

Flow Patterns
Ordering Information
Straight and Angle Patterns for

On-Off Service
Straight Pattern
40G Series Valves
40 Series Valves
Select a 40G series ordering number

from the 40G Series Complete
Ordering Number column, shaded
blue.
Add a material designator to a

40series basic ordering number
from the 40 Series Basic Ordering
Number column, shaded gray.
Example: SS-41GS1
Material Valve Series
To order a valve with UHMWPE

packing, insert E into the valve
ordering number.
Designator
316 SS
44, 45
SS
Alloy
400
41, 42, 43,

44, 45
Brass
41, 42, 43,

44, 45
Example: SS-41GES1
Examples: M-42S4
SS-44S6
On
Off
Angle-Pattern Valves
Angle-pattern valves have the same options and accessories as straight-pattern
valves; the pressure-temperature ratings (page 5), flow coefficients, and dimensions
are different.
Angle Pattern
To order an angle-pattern valve, add -A to ordering number of a valve with the C

dimension listed.
Examples: SS-43GS4-A
SS-44S6-A
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown
with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
Straight Pattern
Angle Pattern
On
Off
G
max panel
thickness
H
panel
hole
D
E
C
B
A
1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness.
On-Off (2-Way) Valves

End
Connections
Inlet/Outlet
Size
1/16 in.
1/8 in.
Cv
Straight Angle
0.10
0.20
0.60
Fractional
Swagelok
tube
fittings
0.15
0.35
SS-41GS1
SS-41GS2
SS-42GS4
40 Series
Basic
Ordering
Number
-41S1
-41S2
-42S4
1/4 in.
1.4
1.5
0.90
0.90
SS-43GS4
SS-43GS6
-43S4
-43S6
3/8 in.
6.0
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
3 mm
12
6.4
0.20
0.60
Metric
Swagelok
tube
fittings
40G Series
Complete
Ordering
Number
2.0
4.6
3.8
0.15
0.35
SS-41GS3MM
SS-42GS6MM
-44S6
-45S8
-45S12
-41S3MM
-42S6MM
6 mm
1.4
0.90
SS-43GS6MM
-43S6MM
8 mm
1.5
0.90
SS-43GS8MM
-43S8MM
10 mm
6.0
2.0
12 mm 12
0.50
4.6
0.30
SS-42GF2
-44S10MM
-45S12MM
-42F2
1/8 in.
1.2
Female
NPT
0.90
3.0
1/2 in.
1/4 in.
3/8 in.
1/2 in.
Male
NPT
Male NPT/
Swagelok
tube fitting
VCO
fittings
0.75
SS-43GF2
SS-43GF4
-43F2
-43F4
1/4 in.
3/8 in.
Female
ISO/BSP
tapered
0.70
2.6
6.3
1.7
1.5
3.5
0.90
2.6
SS-43GF4RT
6.3
-44F4
-44F6
-45F8
-43F4RT
-44F6RT
-45F8RT
1/4 in.
1.2
0.75
SS-43GM4
-43M4
1/4 in.
1.6
0.75
SS-43GM4-S4
-43M4-S4
0.60
0.35
SS-42GVCO4
-42VCO4
2.4
0.90
SS-43GVCO4
-43VCO4
1/4 in.
0.60
0.35
SS-42GVCR4
-42VCR4
2.4
0.90
SS-43GVCR4
-43VCR4
1/4 in.
Integral
male VCR
fittings
6.0
1/2 in.
-44VCR8
12
Not recommended for panel mounting.
-45VCR8
Orifice
in. (mm)
A
B
0.052 1.68 0.84
Dimensions
in. (mm)
C
D
E
F
0.34 0.28 1.12
G
1/4
(8.6)
(1.32)
(42.7) (21.3)
(28.4)
(6.4)
(15.1)
0.093
2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
19/32 1.36 0.58
(8.6)
(7.1)
H
J
W
19/32 1.36 0.58
(2.36)
(51.1) (25.7) (24.6)
(28.4)
(6.4)
(15.1)
0.125
2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
19/32 1.36 0.58
(6.4)
(15.1)
(8.6)
(7.1)
(34.5) (14.7)
(3.18)
(56.1) (27.9) (27.2)
0.187
2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
(4.75)
(60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2)
0.187
2.58
(4.75)
(65.5)
0.281
3.05 1.52 1.43
(7.14)
(77.5) (38.6) (36.3)
0.406
3.92 1.96 1.74
(10.3)
(99.6) (49.8) (44.2)
0.406
3.92 1.96 1.74
(10.3)
(99.6) (49.8) (44.2)
0.093
1.29 (32.8)
(7.1)
(9.7)
(28.4)
(34.5) (14.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
(34.5) (14.7)
(37.3) (19.8)
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78

(11.2)
(9.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
2.00
3/8
1 1/8 2.07 1.12
(50.8)
(9.5)
(28.6)
3.00
3/8
1 1/2 2.43 1.50
(76.2)
(9.5)
(38.1)
3.00
3/8
1 1/2 2.43 1.50
(76.2)
(9.5)
(38.1)
2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
19/32 1.36 0.58
0.56 (14.2)
0.69 (17.5)
0.69 (17.5)
(8.6)
(52.6) (28.4)
(61.7) (38.1)
(61.7) (38.1)
(2.36)
(51.1) (25.7) (24.6)
(28.4)
(6.4)
(15.1)
0.125
2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
19/32 1.36 0.58
(6.4)
(15.1)
(8.6)
(7.1)
(37.3) (19.8)
(7.1)
(3.18)
(56.1) (27.9) (27.2)
0.187
2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32
1.47 0.78
(4.75)
(60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2)
(37.3) (19.8)
(9.7)
(28.4)
(34.5) (14.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
(34.5) (14.7)
0.187
2.46 1.23 1.20 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32
1.47 0.78
(4.75)
(62.5) (31.2) (30.5) (11.2)
(37.3) (19.8)
(9.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
1 1/8 2.07 1.12
0.281
3.07 1.53 1.43
(7.14)
(78.0) (38.9) (36.3)
0.406
3.92 1.96 1.74
(10.3)
(99.6) (49.8) (44.2)
0.125
1.63
(3.18)
(41.4)
0.187
2.00
(4.75)
(50.8)
0.187
2.06
(4.75)
(52.3)
0.281
2.50
(7.14)
(63.5)
0.281
2.50
(7.14)
(63.5)
0.406
3.12
(10.3)
(79.2)
0.187
2.06 1.03
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78

(11.2)
0.81 (20.6)
1.00 (25.4)
1.03 (26.2)
1.25 (31.8)
1.25 (31.8)
1.56 (39.6)
0.56 (14.2)
0.69 (17.5)
2.00
3/8
(50.8)
(9.5)
(28.6)
3.00
3/8
1 1/2 2.43 1.50
(52.6) (28.4)
(76.2)
(9.5)
(38.1)
0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
19/32 1.36 0.58
(8.6)
(6.4)
(15.1)
(7.1)
(28.4)
(61.7) (38.1)
(34.5) (14.7)
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78

(11.2)
(9.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
(37.3) (19.8)
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78

(11.2)
(9.7)
0.56 (14.2)
0.56 (14.2)
0.69 (17.5)
(4.8)
(19.8)
2.00
3/8
1 1/8 2.07 1.12
(37.3) (19.8)
(50.8)
(9.5)
(28.6)
2.00
3/8
1 1/8 2.07 1.12
(50.8)
(9.5)
(28.6)
3.00
3/8
1 1/2 2.43 1.50
(76.2)
(9.5)
(38.1)
(52.6) (28.4)
(52.6) (28.4)
(61.7) (38.1)
(4.75)
(52.3) (26.2)
0.281
2.50 1.25
(7.14)
(63.5) (31.8)
0.406
3.12 1.56
(10.3)
(79.2) (39.6)
0.187
2.00 1.00 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
(4.75)
(50.8) (25.4) (26.2) (11.2)
(9.7)
(38.9)
0.56 (14.2)
0.69 (17.5)
(9.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
2.00
3/8
1 1/8 2.07 1.12
(50.8)
(9.5)
(28.6)
3.00
3/8
1 1/2 2.43 1.50
(76.2)
(9.5)
(38.1)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
(37.3) (19.8)
(52.6) (28.4)
(61.7) (38.1)
(37.3) (19.8)
0.187
2.20 1.20 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
(4.75)
(55.9) (30.5) (26.2) (11.2)
(9.7)
(38.9)
(4.8)
(19.8)
(37.3) (19.8)
1.12
1/8
19/32 1.36
0.125
1.75 0.88 0.94
(3.18)
(44.4) (22.4) (23.9) 0.44 0.38 (28.4) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78
(11.2) (9.7) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8)
1.88
0.94
(47.8)
(38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3)
(23.9)
0.187
(4.75)
0.125
(3.18)
0.187
1.12 1/8 19/32 1.36

2.13 1.06 1.09 0.44 0.38 (28.4) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78
(54.1) (26.9) (27.7) (11.2) (9.7) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8)
(4.75)
(38.9)
0.281
2.88 1.44
(7.14)
(73.2) (36.6)
0.406
3.12 1.56
(10.3)
(79.2) (39.6)
0.56 (14.2)
0.69 (17.5)
(4.8)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
3.00
(9.5)
(76.2)
(19.8)
(37.3)
1 1/8 2.07
(28.6) (52.6) 1.50
1 1/2 2.43 (38.1)
(38.1)
(61.7)
02
Verdergear
Fast loop pump

VG150.8R
03
Koncar
Pump motor
5AT71A-2 IMB34
Motori u protueksplozijskoj zatiti

Explosion-proof motors / Explosionsgeschtzte Motoren
Motori u
Explosion-proof
protueksplozijskoj motors
zatiti
Explosionsgeschtzte Motoren
4.0. UVOD
4.0. INTRODUCTION
4.0. EINLEITUNG
Motori u protueksplozijskoj zatiti odlikuju

se visokom kvalitetom materijala, robusnom
izvedbom, visokom IP zatitom, leajevima
podmazanim za vijek trajanja, zavrnim
premazom otpornim na utjecaje vremena
i koroziju te izolacijskim sustavom visoke
dielektrike vrstoe predvienim za rad
preko frekvencijskog pretvaraa.
Explosion proof motors are distinguished

by high material quality, robust design, high
index of IP protection, bearings greased
for life, weather and corrosion resistant
final overcoat, and high dielectric strength
insulation system intended to be feed by
static frequency converter.
Die explosionsgeschtzen Motoren zeichnen

sich durch hochwertige, eingesetzte Werkstoffe, robuste Konstruktion, hohe IP Schutzart, dargeschmierte Lager, witterungs- u.
korrosionsfesten Endanstrich und das Isolationssystem hher dielektrischer Festigkeit
vorgesehen fr den Freqnzumrichterbetrieb
aus.
U rudarstvu i mnogim industrijskim granama,

opasnosti od eksplozije stalno su prisutne,
npr. u kemijskoj industriji, u rafinerijama,
na buaim platformama, na benzinskom
stanicama, u prehrambenoj industriji i u
tvrtkama za gospodarenje otpadom.
Rizik od eksplozije uvijek postoji kada se
plinovi, pare, maglice ili praine mijeaju s
kisikom iz zraka u eksplozivni omjer u blizini
izvora zapaljenja tako da postoji mogunost
oslobaanja tzv. minimalne energije
zapaljenja.
Protueksplozijska oprema dizajnirana je
u razliitim vrstama zatite, na nain da
se pravilnom upotrebom moe sprijeiti
eksplozija.
Lokalni uvjeti moraju biti podijeljeni u zone
opasnosti, koje definira korisnik u suradnji
s odgovarajuom institucijom, sukladno
uestalosti i trajanju pojave opasnosti od
eksplozije.
Ureaji (oprema) su kategorizirani prema
navedenim zonama.
Motori su certificirani prema europskim
i Hrvatskim normama HRN EN 60079-0
(Osnovni zahtjevi), HRN EN 60079-1
(Oklapanje d), HRN EN 60079-7 (Poveana
sigurnost e), HRN EN 60079-15 (Nepalei
ureaji za zonu 2), HRN EN 61241-0
(Zapaljiva praina-opi zahtjevi) i HRN EN
61241-1 (Zatita kuitem tD) od strane
ovlatenog tijela: Ex-Agencije za Republiku
Hrvatsku (Agencija za prostore ugroene
eksplozivnom atmosferom) i CESI Italija za
Europsku zajednicu.
Motori
u
protueksplozijskoj
zatiti
upotrebljavaju se u skupinama danima u
tablici 4.1., kao jedna od prevencija nastanka
eksplozije koja moe rezultirati ozljedama
osoba i oteenju imovine:
Danger of explosion is always present in

mining and many other sectors of industry,
such as chemical industry, refineries, on oil
rigs, fuel pumps, food processing industry
and waste managing companies.
A risk of explosion is always present when
gases, vapours, mists or dusts mix with air in
explosive ratio near ingniton source, so that
there is possibility of releasing of so-called
minimum ignition energy.
Explosion proof equipment is designed in
various types of protection, in such a manner
that, when properly used, it can prevent
explosion if properly applied.
Local conditions must be divided in danger
zones, defined by end user together with
appropriate eatablishment, according to
frequency and duration of appearance of an
explosive gas atmosphere.
Devices (equipment) are categorized
according to designated zones.
Motors are certified according to Croatian
standards HRN EN 60079-0 (Basic
conditions), HRN EN 60079-1 (Enclosure d),
HRN EN 60079-7 (Increased safety e), HRN
EN 60079-15 (Non-sparking devices for zone
2), HRN EN 61241-0 (Flamable dust general
conditions) and HRN EN 61241-1 (Housing
enclosure tD) by authorised body: ExAgencija za Republiku Hrvatsku (Agency
for Areas Endangered by an Explosive
Atmosphere) and CESI (Italy) for EU.
Explosion-proof motors are to be applied in
the following groups (given in the Table 4.1.)
as one kind of prevention from explosion
that can result in harmful injuries of persons
or damaging the property.
Im Bergbau und vielen Industriebereichen

besteht stndige Explosionsgefahr, wie z.B.in
Chemiindustrie, Raffinerien, auf Inselbohrtrmen, auf Benzintankstellen, in Lebensmittelindustrie und Abfallentsorgungsanlagen.
Das Explosionsrisiko besteht immer wenn
Gase, Dmpfe, Schwaden oder Stube mit
dem Sarstoff aus der Luft in zndbares Verhltnis in der Nhe der Zndqlle gemischt
werden, so dass die Mglichkeit der Befreiung sogennanter Mindestzndungsenergie
besteht.
Explosionsgeschtzte Betriebsanlagen werden in verschiedenen Zndschutzarten konstruiert, so dass unter richtiger Anwendung
die Explosion verhindert werden kann.
Die lokalen Bedingungen mssen in gefhrdete Bereiche/Zonen aufgeteilt sein, welche
der Benutzer in Zusammenarbeit mit entsprechenden Behrden und im Einklang mit
der Hufigkeit und der Dar der Explosionsgefahren definiert.
Die Betriebanlagen sind nach angegebenen
Bereichen/Zonen kategorisiert.
Die Motoren sind zertifiziert nach europischen und kroatischen Normen HRN EN
60079-0 (Grundbestimmungen), HRN EN
60079-1 (druckfeste Kapselungd), HRN EN
60079-7 (erhhte Sicherheit e), HRN EN
60079-15 (nichtzndbare Betriebsanlagen
fr Zone 2-n), HRN EN 61241-0 (zndbarer
Stauballgemeine Bedingungen) und HRN
EN 61241-1 (Gehusekapselung tD) von zustndigen Prfbehrden: Ex-Agencija fr die
Republik Kroatien (die Agentur fr durch explosive Atmosphre gefhrdete Gebiete) und
CESI (Italien) fr den EU-Markt.
Die explosionsgeschtzten Motoren werden
in folgenden Verwendungsbereichen eingesetzt (Tabelle 4.1.) als eine Art Vorbeugung
von Explosionen, die mit Verletzungen und
Sachschaden resultieren knnen:
95

Tablica 4.1. / Table 4.1. / Tabelle 4.1.

Skupina I
Group I
Gruppe I
Rudarstvo
Mining
Grubenbau
Skupina II
Group II
Gruppe II
Kemijska i petrokemijska industrija
Chemical and petrochemical industry
Chemische und petrochemische Industrie
Benzinskim stanicama
Petrol stations
Benzintankstellen
Proizvodnja mineralnih ulja i plina
Production of mineral oil and gas
Gas-und Minerallproduktion
Proizvodnja i distribucija plin
Gas production and supply companies
Gasherstellung und - leitung
Mlinovi i silosi
Mills and silos
Mhlen und Silos
Drvna industrija
Wood processing industry
Holzbearbeitungsindustrie
U ostalim sektorima u kojoj postoji opasnost od nastanka eksplozije
In other sectors where danger of explosion

is present
in allen anderen Bereichen wo

Explosionsgefaht besteht
4.0.1. Pregled protueksplozijskih

motora i prednosti
4.0.1. Overwiev and advantages of

explosion proof motors
Na asortiman obuhvaa motore za slijedee

vrste zatite:
Our production program covers the following

kinds of protection:
4.0.1. bersicht
explosionsgeschtzter Motoren
und ihrer Vorteile
Unser Produktionsprogramm deckt folgende
Zndschutzarten ab:
Ex d(e) I
rudarstvo - nadzemlje
mining - surface
Bergbau - Hochbau
Ex de IIC / Ex d IIC
oklapanje kuitem
explosion proof enclosure
druckfeste Kapselung
Ex e II
poveana sigurnost
increased safety
erhhte Sicherheit
Ex nA II
nepalei ureaji
non-sparking devices
nichtzndbare Betriebsanlagen
Ex tD A21/A22
zatita od eksplozije praine u

zonama 21 i 22
areas protected against dust

explosion in zones 21 and 22
Schutz vor Staubexplosion in den

Zonen 21 und 22
U priloenoj tablici sadran je kompletan

pregled naih proizvoda za podruja primjene,
kategorija, vrste zatite i odgovarajue
stupnjeve mehanike zatite motora.
An overview of all out products for areas of

application categories, types of protection
and adequate indexes of motor mechnanical
protection is given in the table below:
Die beiliegende Tabelle bietet den kompletten berblick unserer Produkte fr Anwendungsbereiche, Zndschutzarten und entsprechende Stufen mechanischen Schutzes
fr Motoren.
96
Plin i pare
Gases and
vapour
Gase und
Dmpfe
(G)
Praina
Dust
Staub
(D)
Skupina
Group
Gruppe
Kategorija
ureaja
Device
category
Gertekategorie
Uestalost pojave ex. atmosfere

Appearance frequency of ex.
atmosphere
Erscheinungshufigkeit
explosiver Atmosphre
M2
Nadzemlje
Surface
Grundoberflche
2G
esto
Frequently
Oft
Zona
Zone
Zone
Ex d I
Ex de IIC
1
II
Temp. klasa
Temp. class
Temperaturklasse
Stupanj meh.
zatite
Index of mech.
protection
Stufe des mech.
Schutzes
IP55
T3, T4
IP55
T3, T4
IP55
Tip motora
Motor type
Motortyp
7AT 132 - 315

5AT 71 - 112
7AT 132 - 315
5AZS 63 - 112
5AZN 63 - 160
3G
Rijetko i kratko
Rarely and for short time
Selten und kurzzeitig
2D
esto
Frequently
Oft
21
Rijetko i kratko
Rarely and for short time
Selten und kurzzeitig
22
3D
Ex d IIC
Ex e II
II
II
Vrsta
zatite
Type of
protection
Zndschutzart
Ex nA II
Ex tD A21
Ex tD A22
T3, T4
Max. temp.
kuita
Max. housing
temp.
Max. Gehusetemperatur
135C
IP55
IP6x
IP5x
7AZN 180 - 315

5AT 71- 112
7AT 132 - 315
5AZS 63 - 112
IP6x
5AZN 63 - 160
IP5x
7AZN 180 - 315

Protueksplozijski motori proizvodnje

Konar-MES nude razliite prednosti:
Explosion-proof motors produced by

Konar-MES offer different advantages:
- Motori su dizajnirani sukladno Direktivi

94/9/EU (ATEX 95) i Pravilnikom
o opremi i zatitnim sustavima
namijenjenim za uporabu u prostorima
ugroenim eksplozivnom atmosferom
(NN 123/05).
- Motors are designed in accordance with

Directive 94/9/EU (ATEX 95)
- Uporabom ovih proizvoda korisnici

zadovoljavaju Direktive 1999/92/EU
(ATEX 137) i Pravilnik o najmanjim
zahtjevima sigurnosti i zatite zdravlja
radnika te tehnikom nadgledanju
postrojenja, opreme, instalacija i ureaja
u prostorima ugroenih eksplozivnom
atmosferom (NN 39/06).
- Sveobuhvatne serije protueksplozijskih
motora za zatitu od eksplozivnog plina
i praine
- With application of this devices, end users

meet requirements of Directive 1999/92/
EU (ATEX 137)
- Full-scale series of explosion proof motors
for protection from explosive gases or
vapours
- Single motor design are possible thanks to
different catalogue options
- Request for special charactristics and
protections on request
- Manufacturers declaration for adequate
type of protection is delivered together
with each product
Die vom Konar-MES hergestellten

explosionsgeschtzten Motoren bieten
verschiedene Vorteile:
- Die Motoren werden nach der Richtlinie
94/9/EU (ATEX 95)
- Durch den Einsatz dieser Produkte erfllen
die Benutzer die Richtlinie 1999/92/EU
(ATEX 137)
- alle Baureihen explosionsgeschtzer
Motoren fr den Schutz von explosiven
Gasen und Dmpfe.
- einzelne Motorvarianten sind mglich
dank verschiedener Katalogoptionen
- Sonderanforderungen im Hinblick auf
Charakteristiken und Schutzarten
- jedem Produkt wird die
Konformittserklrung fr entsprechende
Schutzart beigelegt.
- Individualne verzije motora mogue

su zahvaljujui razliitim katalokim
opcijama
- Specijalni zahtjevi u pogledu
karakteristika i zatite na upit
- Uz svaki proizvod isporuuje se Izjava
o sukladnosti za odgovarajuu vrstu
zatite
4.0.2. Eksplozivna atmosfera i

oznaavanje protueksplozijske
zatite ureaja
4.0.2. Explosive atmosphere and

marking of protection category of
electrical device
4.0.2. Explosive Atmosphre

und Bezeichnung der
Gertezndschutzart
Eksplozija je iznenadna kemijska reakcija

zapaljive tvari s kisikom, ukljuujui
oslobaanje velike energije. Zapaljive tvari
mogu biti: plin, isparavanja zapaljive tekuine,
para ili praina. Eksplozija se dogaa u sluaju
podudarnosti tri faktora:
Explosion is a sudden chemical reaction of

flammable substance with air, including
releasing of vast enegy. Flamable substances
can be: gases, evaporation of flammable
fluids, vapour or dust. Explosion is caused in
case of coincidence of three factors:
Die Explosion ist blitzschnelle chemische Reaktion zndfhigen Stoffes mit dem Sarstoff,
einschliesslich Freisetzung groer Energie.
Zndfhige Stoffe knnen sein: Gase, Dmpfe
zndfhige Flssigkeiten, Dmpfe oder Stube.
Die Explosion findet im dem Fall der bereinstimmung dieser drei Faktoren statt:
- Zapaljiva tvar odgovarajue koliine i

koncentracije
- Adequate quantity and concentration of

flammable substance
- Kisik iz zraka
- Oxygene from air
- entsprechende Konzentration und

Menge zndfhigen Stoffes
- Izvor zapaljenja
- Ignition source
- Sarstoff aus der Luft
Integralna zatita od nastajanja eksplozije

podrazumijeva:
1. Prevenciju od nastanka potencijalno
eksplozivne atmosfere
2. Prevenciju od zapaljenja potencijalno
eksplozivne atmosfere
3. Zadravanje ili ograniavanje podruja
uinaka eksplozije.
Suvremeni se pristup analizi protueksplozijske
zatite u pogonima, opisan navedenim
Europskim Direktivama, temelji na analiziranju
procesa, materijala i tvari te uzronika
paljenja (npr. vrue povrine, elektrine i
mehanike iskre elektrinih strojeva i sl.) koji
u odreenim interakcijskim odnosima mogu
dovesti do neeljene pojave eksplozije.
Protueksplozijske zatita u prostoru ugroenom
eksplozivnom atmosferom temelji na se primjeni
ureaja (elektromotora) koji osiguravaju
odreenu razinu sigurnosti (eng. Equipment
Protection Levels - EPL), odnosno udovoljavaju
odreenoj kategoriji, a koji su zahtijevani
mjestom primjene (zonom opasnosti).
Integral protection from explosion implies:

1. Prevention from occurrence of
potentially explosive atmosphere
- Zndqlle
Der Integralschutz gegen die Explosionsentstehung setzt Folgendes voraus:
2. Prevention from ignition of potentially

explosive atmosphere
1. Vorbeugung von Entstehung potentiell

3. Retaining or limiting area of explosion

efects
2. Vorbeugung von Zndung potentiell

Modern approaches to analysis of explosive

proof protection in plants, described in stated
European Directives, are based on analyzing
of processes, materials, substances and
causes of ignition (e.g. hot areas, electrical
and mechanical sparks from electric machines
etc.) which in certain interaction relations can
cause unwanted explosion.
Explosion proof protection in dangerous areas
with explosive atmosphere (hazardous area)
is based on application of equipment (electric
motors) which assure certain protection level
(Equipment Protection Levels EPL), in other
words, meet requests of specific category
which are requiered by site of application
(dangerous zone)
3. Einhaltung oder Begrenzung der

Explosionseinwirkungsbereiche
Moderne Vorgehensweisen bei der Explosionsschutzanalyse in Betrieben, beschrieben in
genannten europischen Richtlinien, basieren
auf der Analyse der Prozesse, Materialien und
Stoffe, sowie des Zndauslsers (z.B. heisse
Oberflche,elektrisch und mechanisch verursachte Funken elektrischer Maschinen und .),
die in bestimmten Interaktionsverhltnissen
zur unerwnschten Explosionserscheinung
fhren knnen.
Der Explosionsschutz in explosionsgefhrdeten Bereichen basiert auf der Anwendung der
Betriebsanlagen (Elektromotoren), die ein bestimmtes Sicherheitsniveau (englisch: Equipment Protection Levels EPL) sichern, bzw.
97

Takvi su prostori, sukladno normi HRN EN

60079-10, podijeljeni u tri zone opasnosti zona 0, 1 i 2. Zona 0 je prostor u kojemu je
eksplozivna atmosfera prisutna trajno ili kroz
dugi vremenski period ili uestalo. Zonu 1
predstavljaju prostori u kojima se pojava
eksplozivne atmosfere tijekom normalnog
rada moe oekivati, dok u zoni 2 pojava
eksplozivne atmosfere u normalnom radu
nije oekivana, a ako se ipak pojavi trajat e
vrlo kratko.
Such areas, according to standard HRN EN

60079-10, are divided in three danger zones: zones 0, 1 and 2. Zone 0 is area where explosive
gas atmosphere is present continuously or is
present for long periods of time or frequently.
Zone 1 represents areas where explosive gas
atmosphere is likely to occur during normal
operation, while in the zone 2 an explosive
gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal
operation and if it does occur, it will exist for a
short period only.
Oznaka mjesta upotrebe:
Indentification of application sites:
- I rudnici bez grupe plinova (metan)
I mines without gas group ( methane)
- IIA-C grupe plinova (za ostala mjesta u

industriji)
IIA-C gas groups (for other places in

industry)
Podjela zapaljivih tvari u skupine A, B i C

obavljena je prema irini propisanog raspora
sastava MESG (Maximum Experimental
Safe Gap) to pokazuje sposobnost prodora
plamena nastalog unutar oklapanja sluajnim
sagorijevanjem smjese neke od zapaljivih
tvari sa zrakom, kroz takav raspor sastava.
Ova sposobnost opada od grupe C prema
grupi A, to znai da zahtjevi postavljeni na
izvedbu protueksplozijske zatite elektrinog
ureaja rastu od grupe A prema grupi C.
Temperaturni
razredi
elektrinih
ureaja - Svi elektrini i neelektrini ureaji
namijenjeni za rad u prostorima ugroenim
eksplozivnom atmosferom, razvrstani u
temperaturne razrede smiju se zagrijavati
prema nie navedenoj tablici. Temperaturni
razredi takoer klasificiraju i plinove i pare u
odgovarajue temperaturne razrede sukladno
njihovoj temperaturi paljenja. Temelj te podjele
je da zagrijane povrine elektrinih ureaja
i plinovi i pare, odnosno zapaljive praine
jednakog temperaturnog razreda nikada ne
mogu uzrokovati paljenje okolne eksplozivne
atmosfere. Najvie doputene nadtemperature
odreene su uz dogovorenu temperaturu
okoline od 40C. Za veu temperaturu okoline
dozvoljena nadtemperatura se umanjuje za
isti iznos koliko se poveala temperatura
okoline u odnosu na 40C. Iz vrijednosti u
tablici vidimo da je za podruje podzemnog
rudarstva zagrijavanje ogranieno i to u
odnosu na temperaturu tinjanja zapaljive
ugljene praine, a ureaji za podruje II su
podijeljeni u 6 temperaturnih razreda, oznake
T1 do T6, prema zagrijavanju i temperaturi
paljenja plinova i para zapaljivih tekuina.
98
Clasiffication of flammable substances in

classes A, B and C is made accordinglly
to width of prescribed protective gap of
MESG (Maxium Experimental Safe Gap)
which reflects penetration ability of flame,
originating from enclosure by coincidental
combustion of mixture of flammable
substances with air through such a gap. This
ability decreases from class C to class A, which
means that requests placed on explosion
protection design are increasing from class A
to class C.
Temperature classes of electrical devices.
All electrical and non-electrical devices
intended to be used in dangerous explosive
atmosphere areas, and classified in
temperature classes can have temperature
rise
according to the table below.
Temperature classes also classify gases and
vapours in adequate temperature groups
according to their ignition temperature. Basis
for such classification is that hot surfaces of
electrical devices and gases and vapours,
or flammable dust of equal temperature
class, will never be the cause of ignition
of explosive atmosphere environment.
Maximum allowed overtemperature is
defined for agreed ambient temperature of
40C. In case of higher ambient temperature,
the allowe temperature is lowered for the
same figure of difference between ambient
temperature increase in comparison with
40C. Figures given in the table below
show that for underground mining
temperature rise is limited in relation to with
smouldering temperature of flammable coal
dust, and devices for group II are classified
in 6 temperature classes, marks T1 to T6,
according to temperature rise and ignition
temperature of gases and evaporation of
flammable fluids.
bestimmter Kategorie entsprechen, und die

fr jeweilige Verwendungsbereiche (explosionsgefhrdete Zone) vorgesehen sind.
Solche Bereiche sind, gem der Norm HRN
EN 60079-10, in drei explosionsgeschtzte
Zonen aufgeteilt: - Zonen 0, 1 und 2. Zone 0
umfasst Bereiche in denen explosive Atmosphre stndig, langzeitig oder oft vorhanden
ist. Die Zone 1 umfasst Bereiche in denen man
die Erscheinung explosiver Atmosphre whrend des normalen Betriebs erwarten kann,
wobei in der Zone 2 die Erscheinung explosiver Atmosphre im normalen Betrieb nicht zu
erwarten ist, und wenn die trotzdem auftritt,
ist das nur kurzzeitig.
Bezeichnung der Verwendungsbereiche:
I Schlagwettergefhrdete Bergwerke ohne
Explosionsuntergruppe (Methangas)
IIA-C Explosionsuntergruppe (alle brigen
explosionsgefhrdeten Bereiche in der
Industrie)
Die Einteilung der Zndstoffe in Explosionsuntergruppen A, B und C erfolgt nach der
Schutzgrenzspaltweite MESG (Maximum
Experimental Safe Gap ), was die Durchzndungsfhigkeit, innerhalb druckfester Kapselung durch zufllige Verbrennung der Mischung einiger zndfhiger Stoffe mit dem
Sarstoff entstehender Flamme, durch solche
Schutzgrenzspaltweite zeigt. Diese Fhigkeit
sinkt ab von der Explosionsuntergruppe C bis
zu der Explosionsuntergruppe A, was bedeutet, dass die Anforderungen gegenber der
Zndschutzart der elektrischen Betriebsanlage von der Explosionsuntergruppe A zu der
Explosionsuntergruppe C steigen.
Temperaturklassen elektrischer Betriebsanlagen - Alle elektrischen und nichtelektrischen
Betriebsanlagen geeignet fuer den Einsatz in
durch explosive Atmosphaere gefaehrdeten
Bereichen, in Temperaturklassen geteilt, drfen nach folgender Tabelle erwrmt werden.
Die Temperaturklassen klassifizieren auch die
Gase und Dmpfe in entsprechende Temperaturbereiche bereinstimmend mit derer
Zndtemperatur. Der Grund dieser Einteilung
ist, dass erwrmte Oberflchen elektrischer
Betriebsanlagen und Gase und Dmpfe, bzw.
zndfhige Stube gleicher Temperaturklasse
niemals die Zndung umgebender explosiver Atmosphre verursachen knnen. Die
hchstzulssigen bertemperaturen sind bei
vereinbarter Umgebungstemperatur von 40C
bestimmt. Fr hhere Umgebungstemperaturen wird die zullsige bertemperatur um
gleichen Wert verringert, um welchen sich
die Umgebungstemperatur im Verhltnis zu
40C erhht hat. Anhand der Werte aus der
Tabelle sehen wir, dass die Erwrmung fr den
Untergrundbergbaubereich im Verhltnis zur
Glhtemperatur zndfhigen Kohlenstaubs
begrenzt ist, und die Betriebsanlagen fr den
Verwendungsbereich II sind in 6 Temperaturklassen mit den Bezeichnungen T1 bis T6, nach
der Erwrmung und der Zndtemperatur der
Gase und Dmpfe zndfhiger Flssigkeiten
eingeteilt.

Skupina
Group
Gruppe
II
Temperaturni
razred
Temperature class
Temperaturklasse
Temperatura
Temperature
Temperatur
(C)
Najvia doputena nadtemperatura ureaja

Maximum allowed overtemperature of device
Hchstzulssige bertemperatur des
Betriebsmittels
(C)
Temperatura paljenja
Ignition temperature
Zndtemperatur
(C)
200
160
T1
450
410
> 450
T2
300
260
300 - 450
T3
200
160
200 - 300
T4
135
95
135 - 200
T5
100
60
100 - 135
T6
85
45
< 100
Svaki protueksplozijski zatien elektrini

ureaj oznaen je u skladu sa normom HRN
EN 60079-0 i natpisnom ploicom na kojoj
se nalaze podaci protueksplozijske zatite.
Primjeri oznaavanja PEX zatite na PEX
ureaju u skladu sa direktivama ATEX 94/9 EC:
Each explosion-proof protected electrical

device is marked according to standard HRN
EN 60079-0 with rating name plate with data
for explosion-proof protection. Examples for
identification of PEX protection on PEX device
in accordance with directives ATEX 94/9EC:
Jedes explosionsgeschtztes elektrisches Gert wird bereinstimmend mit der Norm HRN
EN 60079-0 und mit dem Leistungsschild, auf
welchem sich die Zndschutzartdaten befinden, bezeichnet. Es folgen die Bezeichnungsbeispiele der Zndschutzarten auf dem Gert bereinstimmend mit den ATEX 94/9EC
Richtlinien :
99


Oznaka sukladnosti proizvoda
Compliance identification
Produktkonformittsbezeichnung
VRSTA ZATITE PROTECTION TYPE ZNDSCHUTZART

NORMA STANDARD DIE NORM
s direktivama Europske zajednice

With EU directives
mit EU Richtlinien
s propisanim tehnikim zahtjevima RH
With prescribed technical requests of RH
mit vorgeschriebenen technischen
Bestimmungen in Kroatien
Oklapanje
Enclosure
Druckfeste Kapselung
CESI Italija Italy Italien
722
PTB Njemaka Germany

Deutschland
102
EX agencija RH Croatia
Kroatien
E-1/08
CE
0722
1, 2
Ex e
Zatita kuitem
Housing enclosure
Schutz durch das Gehuse
Oznaka Ident. Bezeichnung
Ex d
HRN EN 60079-7
Nepalei ureaj
Non-sparking devices
Nichtentzndbare Betriebsanlage
Naziv Name Name
ZONA
ZONE
ZONE
HRN EN 60079-1
Poveana sigurnost
Increased safety
Erhhte Sicherheit
Certifikacijska kua Certifying body

Prfbehrde
OZNAKA
IDENTIFICATION
BEZEICHNUNG
Ex n
HRN EN 60079-15
2D
HRN EN 61241-1
Znak za protueksplozijski zatien ureaj

Marking of EX protected device
Zeichen der explosionsgeschtzten Betriebsanlage
za Europsku zajednicu
for EU
fr die EU
Za Republiku Hrvatsku
For the Republic of Croatia
fr die Republik Kroatien
II 2G
Ex d
IIC T4
UVJETI I PODJELA PROSTORA I UREAJA CONDITIONS AND CLASSIFICATION OF AREA AND DEVICES
BEDINGUNGEN UND EINTEILUNG DER BEREICHE UND GERTE
Oznaavanje opreme i ureaja EN
Podjela prostora ugroenog
Vremensko prisutstvo zapaljivih/ ekIdentification of equipment and devices EN
eksplozijom EN, IEC
splozivnih smjesa u Ex prostoru Time of
Bezeichnung der Ausrstung und Gerte EN
Classification of hazardous
flammable/explosion mixtures presence
area EN, IEC Einteilung exGrupa ureaja
Kategorija ureaja
Verweildar zndfhiger/explosionsfhiger
gefhrdeten Bereichs nach
Device group
Device category
Misschungen im ex-gefhrdetem Bereich
EN, IEC
Gertegruppe
Gertekategorie
100
Plinovi i pare
Gases and
vapours
Gase und
Dmpfe
Praina
Vlakanca
Dust and
fibres
Staub und
Faser
Metan
ugljena
praina
Methane.
Coal dust
Methan.
Kohlenstaub
Trajno, dugotrajno, vrlo esto Permanently,

longlasting, frequently stndig, langzeitig,
sehr oft
Povremeno Periodically gelegentlich
Vrlo rijetko i kratkotrajno Rarely and short
timed sehr selten und kurzzeitig
Trajno, dugotrajno, vrlo esto Permanently,
longlasting, frequently stndig, langzeitig,
sehr oft
Povremeno Periodically gelegentlich
Vrlo rijetko i kratkotrajno Rarely and short
timed sehr selten und kurzzeitig
-
Zona 0
Zone 0
Zona 1 Zone 1
1G
II
2G ili/ or /oder 1G
Zona 2 Zone 2
3G ili/ or /oder 2G ili/ or /oder 1G
Zona 20 Zone 20
1D
Zona 21 Zone 21
II
Zona 22 Zone 22
2D ili/ or /oder 1D
3D ili/ or /oder 2D ili/ or /oder 1D
M1
Rudarstvo
Mining
Bergbau
M2 ili/ or /oder M1
1, 2
21,22

A
E
E
PRINCIP ZATITE
PROTECTION PRINCIPLE
SCHUTZPRINZIP
PRIMJENA
APPLICATION
ANWENDUNG
Onemoguen je prijenos eksplozije na atmosferu izvan kuita

Transfer of explosion outside of housing is prevented
Explosionsbertragung auf die Atmosphre ausserhalb des Gehuses
ist nicht mglich
Posebnim mjerama i s visokim stupnjem sigurnosti onemoguene su nedozvoljeno visoke temperature i iskrenje na ureajima
Unallowed high temperatures and sparking on devices are prevented by special
measures and high protection level.
Durch Sondermanahmen und hohe Sicherheitsstufe sind hohe Temperaturen
und Funkenbildung auf den Gerten verhindert.
Razliite metode zatite
Different protection methods
Verschiedene Schutzmethoden
Sklopni aparati, motori, svjetiljke, upravljake kombinacije kuita

Circuit apparatus, motors, lamps housing control combinations
Schaltgerte, Motoren, Lampen, Sterungskombinationen des Gehuses
Razvodne kutije, razvodita, motori, svjetiljke, kuita

Transmitting boxes and places, motor, lamps, housings
Verteilungsschrnke, Verteilungsstellen, Motoren, Lampen, Gehuse
Sve primjene za zonu 2
All zone 2 applications
Alle Anwendungen fr Zone 2
Uzronik paljenja odvojen od eksplozivne atmosfere

Cause of ignition is separated from explosive atmosphere
Zndungsursache getrennt von der explosiven Atmosphre
Sve primjene
All applications
Alle Anwendungen
Temperaturni razred
Temperature class
Temperaturklassen
Eksplozivne grupe Explosive groups Explosionsgruppen

Skupina plinova
Gas gropus
Gasgruppe
Karakteristian plin
Characteristic gas
Charakteristischer Gas
450 C
T1
300 C
T2
200 C
T3
metan methane Methan
135 C
T4
IIA
propan propane Propan
100 C
T5
IIB
etilen ethylene Ethylen
T6
IIC
vodik hydrogen Wasserstof
85 C
PODJELA NAJEIH PLINOVA I PARA PREMA SKUPINI PLINOVA I TEMPERATURNOM RAZREDU

CLASSIFICATION OF MOST COMMON GASES AND VAPOURS ACC. TO GAS GROUP AND TEMP. CLASS
EINTEILUNG MEISTVORKOMMENDER GASE UND DMPFE NACH GASGRUPPEN UND TEMPERATURKLASSEN
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
IIA
Amonijak Ammonia
Ammoniak
Etan Ethane Ethan
Propan Propane Propan
Benzol Benzolene Benzol
Etilacetat Ethyl acetate
Ethylacetat
Metanol Methanol Methanol
Aceton Acetone Aceton
Etilalkohol Ethyl
alcohol Ethylalkohol
i-amilacetat
i-amilacetate
i-Amyilacetat
n-butan n-butane
n-Butan
n-butilalkohol n-butyl
alcohol n-Butylalkohol
Benzin Gasoline
Benzin
Kerozin kerosene
Kerosin
n-heksan n-hexane
n-Hexan
dizel gorivo diesel
fuels Dieselkraftstoff
lo ulje heating oil
Heizl
Etileter ethyl ether ethyl

ether
Acetilaldehid
acetaldehyde
Acetaldehyd
Benzaldehid
benzaldehyde
Benzaldehyd
Dibutileter dibutylether
Dibuthylether
Dihekslieter dihexsylethr
Dihexsylether
IIB
gradski plinovi
city gas
Stadtgas
Etilen Ethylene
Ethylen
Sumporovodik
hydrogene sulphide
Ethylene glycol
Etileter ethyl ether ethyl

ether
Dietileter diethyl ether
Diethylether
IIC
Vodik Hydrogen Wasserstoff
Acetilen Acetylene
Acethylen
Uljini Disulfid
Carbon disulphide
Schwefelkohlenstoff
T6
metan methane Methane
101

4.1. MOTORI SERIJE AT U

PROTUEKSPLOZIJSKOJ ZATITI
OKLAPANJE D
4.1. MOTORS OF AT SERIES IN

PROTECTION ENCLOSURE D
4.1. MOTORENBAUREIHE
AT DER ZNDSCHUTZART
DRUCKFESTE KAPSELUNG-D
Trofazni asinkroni kavezni motori potpuno

zatvorene
izvedbe
hlaeni
vlastitim
ventilatorom IC411, te izvedeni u vrsti
PEX zatite oklapanje d prikladni su za
uporabu u zonama opasnosti 1 i 2 ugroenim
eksplozivnom atmosferom i to za podruje
primjene II (sva industrija osim rudnika).
U tim zonama je povremeno mogua
prisutnost takve atmosfere u normalnom
radu postrojenja (zona1) ili se njena pojava
ne oekuje, a ako se pojavi, traje samo kratko
vrijeme (zona 2). Eksplozivnu atmosferu ini
smjesa neke zapaljive tvari sa zrakom u obliku
plina, para, maglice ili praine. Navedene zone
opasnosti postoje na primjer: u pogonima za
proizvodnju tehnikih plinova, punionicama
plinova, koksarama, lakirnicama, kemijskoj
i farmaceutskoj industriji, rafinerijama,
tankerima i slino.
Three-phase induction TEFC motors, and

designed in protection enclosure d may be
used in zones 1 and 2 endangered by explosive
atmosphere, area of use II (all industry except
mining). In these zones such an atmosphere
can occur during normal operation (zone 1),
or its appearing is not expected and if it does
occur, it lasts for short time period (zone 2).
Explosive atmosphere is a mixture of some
flammable substances and air in the form of
gas, vapour, mist or dust. Named dangerous
zones exists in e.g.: gas plants, coke plants,
paint shops, chemical and pharmaceutical
industry, refineries, tankers etc.
Dreiphasige Asynchronmotoren mit Kfiglufer vllig geschlossener Ausfhrung mit

Eigenlfter gekhlt (Khlungsart IC411) und
ausgefhrt in der Zndschutzart druckfeste Kapselung-d sind fr die Anwendung in
Gefahrenzonen 1 und 2 mit explosiver Atmosphre und fr den Verwendungsbereich II
(Industrie ausser Bergbau) geeignet. In diesen
Zonen ist es mglich, dass solche Atmosphre gelegentlich bei normalen strungsfreiem
Betrieb anwesend ist (Zone 1) oder dass man
die Erscheinung solcher Atmosphre nicht
erwartet, und wenn sie erscheint, ist das nur
kurzzeitig (Zone 2). Die explosive Atmosphre
bildet eine Mischung aus Zndstoff und Luft
in Form von Gasen, Dmpfen, Schwaden oder
Staub. Die genannten Gefahrbereiche bestehen z.B. in Produktionssttten technischer
Gase, Gasfllstellen, Kokereien, Lackiereien,
in chemischer und pharmazeutischer Industrie, Raffinerien,Tankerschiffen und hnlichen
Betrieben.
Motori serije 5AT i 7AT certificirani su prema

europskim normama i normama Republike
Hrvatske: HRN EN 60079-0, HRN EN 60079-1,
HRN EN 60079-7, HRN EN 61241-0 i HRN EN
61241-1 od strane Ex-Agencije Republike
Hrvatske i CESI Italija za vrste PEX zatite ATEX II
2G Ex d(e). Dodatno, motori su certificirani i za
zapaljive plinova i praina za vrste zatite ATEX
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP65(6) T135C. Motori serije
7AT certificirani su i za podruje rudarstva vrste
zatite ATEX I M2 Ex d(e) I za mjesta uporabe s
malenom opasnou od mehanikih oteenja
i zaruavanja.
POGON PREKO FREKVENCIJSKOG
PRETVARAA.
Serije motora 5AT i 7AT su projektirane i ispitane
u skladu s IEC 60034-1 (to. 8.5 i 8.6) i mogu raditi
preko frekvencijskog pretvaraa u uvjetima u
skladu s IEC 60034-17 u podruju regulacije od
5 do 87 Hz za polaritete motora 2p=2, a za ostale
polaritete u podruju regulacije od 5 do 100 Hz s
optereenjima prikazanim u grafikonu 1. Motori
predvieni za pogon preko frekvencijskog
pretvaraa u namotu imaju ugraenu termiku
zatitu. Frekvencijski pretvara se nalazi van
zone opasnosti. Na dodatnoj natpisnoj ploici
definirane su karakteristike motora pri radu na
razliitim frekvencijama.
102
Motors of series 5AT and 7AT are certified

in conformity with European standards and
standards of Republic of Croatia: HRN EN
60079-0, HRN EN 60079-1, HRN EN 60079-7,
HRN EN 61241-0 and HRN EN 61241-1 by EX
Agency of the Republic of Croatia and CESI
(Italy) for all types of explosion protection
ATEX II 2G Exd(e). Additionally, motors have
been certified for area of flammable gases
and vapours protection type ATEX II 2D Ex tD
A21 IP65(6) T135C as well. Motors of series
7AT have been certified for area of mining in
protection type ATEX I M2 Ex d(e) I for areas
of application with less danger of mechanical
damages and earth sliding.
SUPPLY OVER FREQUENCY CONVERTER.
Motors of 5AT and 7AT series are designed
and tested in accordance with IEC 60034-1
(article 8.5 and 8.6) and can be driven
(supplied) through frequency converter, in
terms compatible with IEC 60034-17, within
regulation range between 5 to 87 Hz for
motor polarity 2p=2, and for other polarities
in range of regulation between 5 to 100
Hz loaded as shown in Chart 1. Motors for
frequency converter drive have a built-in
thermal protection in winding. Frequency
converter is situated outside hazardous area.
Motor characteristics in operation at various
frequencies are defined on the additional
rated name plate.
Die Motoren der Baureihen 5AT und 7AT sind

nach europischen Normen und Normen
der Republik Kroatien zertifiziert: HRN EN
60079-0, HRN EN 60079-1, HRN EN 60079-7,
HRN EN 61241-0 und HRN EN 61241-1 von EX
Agencija fr Kroatien und CESI (Italien) fr die
Zndschutzarten ATEX II 2G Exd(e). Zustzlich sind die Motoren fr den Staubexplosionsschutz in der Zndschutzart ATEX II 2D
Ex tD A21 IP65(6) T135C zertifiziert. Die Motoren der Baureihe 7AT sind auch frs Bergbauwesen der Zndschutzart ATEX I M2 Ex
d(e) I fr Verwendungsbereiche mit geringer
Gefahr von mechanischen Beschdigungen
und Erdrutschen zertifiziert.
FREQNZUMRICHTERBETRIEB.
Die Motoren der Baureihen 5AT und 7AT sind
projektiert und geprft bereinstimmend mit
IEC 60034-1 (Artikel 8.5 und 8.6) und knnen
ber den Freqnzumrichter betrieben werden
unter Bedingungen bereinstimmend mit IEC
60034-17, im Regelbereich von 5 bis 87Hz fr
Polpaarzahlen der Motoren 2p=2 und fr andere Polpaarzahlen im Regelbereich von 5 bis
100Hz unter den Belastungen, die in der Grafik 1 dargestellt sind. Die Motoren vorgesehen
fr den Freqnzumrichterbetrieb haben in der
Wicklung einen thermischen Schutz eingebaut.
Der Freqnzumrichter befindet sich ausserhalb
des explosionsgefhrdeten Bereichs. Auf zustzlichem Leistungsschild sind die Motorcharakteristiken beim Betrieb auf verschiedenen
Freqnzen definiert.

Grafikon 1. Rad preko frekvencijskog

pretvaraa (dozvoljena optereenja vrijede
za trajni rad S1)
Chart 1. Frequency converter drive

(permissible loads are applicable at
continuous duty S1)
Graphikon
1.
Freqnzumricherbetrieb
(zulssige Belastungen gelten fr den
Darbetrieb S1)
100
90
80
70
Vlastita ventilacija
Own ventilation
Eigenbelftung
60
50
40
Prisilna ventilacija
Forced ventilation
Fremdbelftung
30
20
10
Graf prikazuje opi pristup projektiranju

motora
u
protueksplozijskoj
zatiti
ukljuujui faktor sigurnosti svi motori
u protueksplozijskoj zatiti opremljeni
frekvencijskim pretvaraem projektirani su s
10% rezerve (sigurnosti), to znai da se tim
pristupom, za odreene uvjete rada, odabire
motor za rang vei u odnosu na odgovarajui
motor napajan izravno s mree. Kada je
motor projektiran za vrijednosti razliitih od
prikazanih na Grafikonu 1, isti je potvren
ispitivanjem.
Chart explains general approach in designing

of explosion-proof motors, including safety
factor all explosion-proof protected motors
driven through frequency converter are
designed with 10% of safety reserve, what
means that with such approach , in specific
working condition a motor of one rank higher
is selected, in comparison with related motor
supplied directly from power supply. When
motor is designed for values different than
shown in Chart 1, the same must be confirmed
with benchmark tests.
Sve to daje Vam, kao korisniku, potpunu

sigurnost da MOTORI NEE BITI UZROK
ZAPALJENJA
u
zonama
opasnosti
ugroenim eksplozivnom atmosferom.
All of the aforementioned facts assure you,

as end user, that MOTORS WILL NOT BE
IGNITION CAUSE in dangerous zones with
explosive atmosphere.
Die Grafik stellt generellen Ansatz bei der

Projektierung explosionsgeschtzter Motoren, einschliesslich Sicherheitsfaktor, - alle
freqnzumrichterbetriebene, explosionsgeschtzte Motoren sind mit einer 10%-tiger
Sicherheitsreserve projektiert, was bedeutet,
dass man nach diesem Ansatz, fr bestimmte Betriebsbedingungen, den ranghheren
Motor im Verhltnis zum direkt aus dem Netz
gespeistem Motor, auswhlt. Wenn sich die
Werte des Motors von denen in der Grafik
dargestellten unterscheiden, sind diese mit
der Prfung besttigt.
All dass gibt Ihnen als Benutzer absolute
Sicherheit, dass diese MOTOREN NICHT DIE
URSACHE DER ZNDUNG in gefhrdeten
Bereichen mit explosiver Atmosphre sein
werden.
103


Standardna izvedba
104
Standard design
Grundausfhrung
Serije :
Series
Baureihen:
5AT 71-112 siluminsko tlano lijevano

orebreno kuite s odlivenim nogama i
ormari, titovi od sivog lijeva
7AT 132-315 orebreno kuite od sivog
lijeva, montane noge, titovi i ormari
od sivog lijeva
5AT 71 112 aluminum alloy die casted

ribbed housing with die casted feet, cast iron
terminal box and bearing shields
7AT 132 315 cast iron ribbed housing,
demountable feet, cast iron terminal box
and bearing shields
5AT 71 112 geripptes AluDruckgussgehuse mit gegossenen Fen,

Klemmenkasten aus Alu-Druckguss,
Graugusslagerschilder (nur bei Exd)
7AT 132 315 geripptes Gehuse mit
geschraubten Fen, Klemmenkasten und
Lagerschilder kpl.aus GG
PEX zatita:
EX protection
Zndschutzart:
ATEX II 2G Ex d(e) IIC T4/T3 (kuite

motora u d, prikljuni ormari u e)
ATEX II 2G Ex d(e) IIC T4/T3 (housing in

enclosure d, terminal box in e)
ATEX II 2G Ex d(e) IIC T4/T3 (Motorgehuse

in d,Klemmenkasten in e)
Oblici ugradnje:
Mounting designs:
Bauformen:
IMB3, B5, B35, B14 i B34 (dva posljednja

do veliine 132)
IMB3, B5, B35, B14 i B34 (last two up to

frame size 132)
IMB3, B5, B35, B14 i B34 (letzten zwei bis

Baugre 132)
Prikljuni ormari:
Terminal box:
Klemmenkasten:
Ormari gore smjeten kod motora s

nogama, gledano s pogonske strane
vratila gore
Terminal box situated on top, viewed from

motor drive end side at motor with feet
Klemmenkasten oben, bei Fumotoren - von

der Wellenantriebsseite betrachtet,
Kabelverschraubungen in e nach technischen Erluterungen
Raspon snaga:
Power range:
Leistungsberereich
Serija 5AT 71-112 raspon snaga:

0.09 4,0 kW,
serija 7AT 132-315 raspon snaga:
2,2 160 kW
Series 5AT 71 112 with power range

0,09 4,0 kW:
7AT 132 315 with power range
2,2 160 kW
Baureihe 5AT 71 112: Leistungsbereich

0,09 4,0 kW;
Baureihe7AT132315: Leistungsbereich
2,2 160 kW
Vrsta pogona:
Duty:
Betriebsart:
S1 (za okolinu 20 C do + 40 C i postav

do 1000 m nm.)
S1 (for ambient -20C to +40C and up to

1000 ASL)
S1(fr Umgebungstemperatur von -20C bis

+40C und Aufstellung bis 1000 m ber den
Meeresspiegel)
Napon i frekvencija:
Voltage and frequency:
Spannung und Freqnz:
230/400V 10% /Y (do 2,2 kW),

400/690V 10% /Y (od 3 kW) i 50Hz
230/400V 10% /Y (up to 2,2 kW),

400/690V 10% /Y (3 kW and above)
and 50Hz
230/400V 10% /Y (bis 2,2 kW),

400/690V 10% /Y (ab 3 kW ) und 50Hz
Iskoristivost:
Efficiency:
Wirkungsgrad:
u klasi IE1/IE2 prema IEC 60034-30
in class IE1/IE2 according to IEC 60034-30
in Wirkungsgradklasse IE1/IE2
nach IEC 60034-30
Broj polova:
Number of poles:
Polzahl:
jednobrzinski motori: 2, 4, 6 i 8
single speed motors: 2, 4, 6 and 8
Eintourige Motoren: 2, 4, 6 und 8
Stupanj zatite:
Protection index:
Schutzgrad:
IP 55
IP 55
IP 55
Klasa izolacije:
Insulation class:
Isolationsklasse:
F (zagrijavanje u B, ica u H i C klasi)
F (temperature rise in B, wire in H and C)
F ( Erwrmung im B, Draht im H und C

Wrmeklasse)
Ton boje:
Colour tone:
Farbton:
RAL 7030 ( poliuretanska boja)
RAL 7030 (polyurethane lacquer)
RAL 7030 (Poliurethanlack)


Opcije PEX zatite Explosion protection options Optionen der Zndschutzart
PEX zatita
Explosion protection
Zndschutzart
Opis
Description
Beschreibung
Serije:
Series:
Baureihen:
II 2G Exd IIC T4/T3
Kuite motora i prikljuni

ormari u d, bez uvodnica s
Ex epovima
Motor housing and terminal

box in d, without cable glands
but with certified plugs
Motorgehuse und Klemmenkasten in d, ohne Kabelverschraubungen mit EX-Stopfen
5AT i 7AT
II 2G Exd IIC T4/T3
Kuite motora u d, bez

prikljunog ormaria s
DIREKTNIM UVODOM kabela
1,5 m duljine
Motor housing in d without

terminal box, with DIRECT
CABLE ENTRY length 1,5m
Motorgehuse in d, ohne
Klemmenkasten mit direkter
Kabeleinfhrung des Kabels der
Lnge von 1,5 m
5AT i 7AT
II 2GD Ex d(e) IIC T4/T3;

Ex tD A21 IP65(6) T135 C
Kuite motora u d,
prikljuni ormari u d ili e,
za PLINOVE i PRAINU
Motor housing in d, terminal

box in d or e, for GASES and
DUST
Motorgehuse in
d,Klemmenkasten in doder
e fr Gase und Dmpfe
5AT i 7AT
Motor housings in d, terminal

box in d or e, for GASES and
DUST and ambient temperature
-20C to +80C
Motorgehuse in
d,Klemmenkasten in doder
e, fr Gase und Dmpfe, und
Umgebungstemperatur von
-20C bis +80C
5AT i 7AT
Motor housings in d, terminal

box in d or e, for mines
and areas of usage with small
danger of mechanical damages
or earth slidings
Motorgehuse in d, Klemmenkasten in d oder e fr den

Bergbau und Verwendungsbereiche mit wenig Gefahr vor
mechanischen Beschdigungen und Erdrutschen
Kuita elektromotora u d,
prikljuni ormari u d ili e,
II 2G Exd(e) IIB T3
za PLINOVE i PRAINU, te
II 2D ExtD A21 IP65(6) T200 C temperaturu okoline: -20C
do 80C
I M2 Ex d(e) I
Kuite motora u d, prikljuni

ormari u d ili e, za rudnike i
za mjesta uporabe s malenom
opasnou od mehanikih
oteenja i zaruavanja
7AT
105


Mogunosti
Dodatne izvedbe motora:
106
Options
Additional design options:
Optionen
Optionale Motorausfhrungen:
voltages (or multi-voltage) and

drugi naponi (ili vienaponski) i frekvencije other
frequencies
andere Spannungen (oder Mehrspannungsbereiche) und Freqnzen
drugi broj pari polova za jedno i

viebrzinske motore
different pole numbers for single and multispeed motors
anderen Polzahlen fr ein-u.mehrtourige

Motoren
drugi oblici ugradnje
other mounting arrangements
andere Bauformen
termika zatita (PTC sonde ili

termoprekidai)
thermal protection (PTC thermistors or

thermal switches)
thermischer Schutz (PTCKaltleiter oder

Thermoschalter)
dva izlazna kraja vratila
free shaft end on both motor side
zwei Wellenenden (auf AS und BS)
posebne prirubnice i krajevi vratila
special flanges and free shaft ends
Sonderflanschen und Wellenenden
izvedba s ormariem desno ili lijevo
terminal box on left or right motor side
Ausfhrung mit dem Klemmenkasten rechts

oder links
ostali tonovi boje i /ili vrste nalia
other colour tones and/or surface paints
andere Farbtne und/oder Anstrichsarten
bez ventilacije (nain hlaenja IC410)
non-ventilated (cooling type TENV IC 410)
unbelftet (Khlungsart IC 410)
namot za tropske uvjete
winding for tropical environment
Tropenwicklung
grijai namota
winding heaters
Stillstandheizung
brodska izvedba (ABT izvedba)
marine design (ABT)
Schiffsausfhrung (ABT Baureihe)
stupanj zatite : IP56, IP65, IP66
protection indexes: IP56, IP65, IP66
Schutzgrad: IP56, IP65, IP66
valjkasti leajevi
roller bearings
Rollenlager
mazalice
regreasing facility
Nachschmiereinrichtungen mit
Schmiernippel
za vrste pogona S2-S10
for duty types S2 to S10
fr Betriebsarten S2 bis S10
druge temperaturne razrede T1 T4
other temperature classes: T1 T4
fr andere Temperaturklassen: T1 T4
za druge temperature okoline (20 C do + for other ambient temperatures (-20C to

50 C, 20 C do + 60 C, -20 C do + 80 C) +50C; -20C to +60C; -20C to +80C)
fr andere Umgebungstemperaturen (-20C

bis +50C; -20C bis +60C; -20C bis +80C)
pogon preko pretvaraa za 2-polne motore

u regulacijskom podruju 5-87 Hz, a za
ostale na upit
frequency inverter driven: 2 pole within

regulation range 5 87 Hz, other on request
Freqnzumrichterbetrieb: 2-polig in dem

Regelbereich 5 87 Hz,fr die anderen auf
Anfrage
i ostale izvedbe prema elji kupca
and other customer demand based design
und andere kundenspezifische Ausfhrungen
Prigraeno na motor:
Built-in:
auf den Motor angebaut:
s prigraenom Ex d(e) II zatienom

konicom
Ex d(e) II protected brake
Ex d(e) II geschtzte Bremse
s prigraenom Ex d(e) II zatienom stranom ventilacijom (nain hlaenja IC416)

(7AT serija )
Ex d(e) II protected forced ventilation

(cooling type IC 416) (7AT series)
Ex d(e) II geschtzte
Fremdlftung(Khlungsart IC 416)
(7AT Baureihe)
s prigraenom Ex d(e) II enkoderom
Ex d(e) encoder
Ex d(e) Drehimpulsgeber

TEHNIKI PODACI
TECHNICAL DATA
TECHNISCHE DATEN
2p=2
3000 min-1
440V/60Hz/3600 min-1
400V/50Hz
P
(kW)
Motor type
n (min-1)
(%)
cos
In (A)
Ik
In
Mk
Mn
Mmax
Mn
J (kgm2)
m (kg)
P (kW)
n (min-1)
In (A)
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5AT 71A-2
5AT 71B-2
5AT 80A-2
5AT 80B-2
5AT 90S-2
5AT 90L-2
5AT 100L-2
5AT 112M-2
2750
2760
2830
2830
2820
2820
2870
2900
70
70
73
79
78
80.5
83
85
0.80
0.82
0.80
0.83
0.82
0.79
0.84
0.85
0.95
1.4
1.85
2.45
3.4
5
6.2
8.0
3.8
4.2
4.5
4.9
5.3
5.6
6.6
7.0
2.0
2.2
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.8
3.2
3.2
2.1
2.2
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.9
3.4
3.4
0.000350
0.000530
0.000930
0.001100
0.001500
0.002100
0.004000
0.006300
10
11.2
14
16.2
18.9
21.8
26.7
37.7
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.7
2.5
3.4
4.5
3300
3260
3400
3400
3385
3385
3420
3480
0.95
1.4
1.85
2.45
3.4
5
6.2
8
5.5
7.5
9.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
7AT 132SA-2
7AT 132SB-2
7AT 132M-2
7AT 160MA-2
7AT 160MB-2
7AT 160L-2
7AT 180M-2
7AT 200LA-2
7AT 200LB-2
2900
2900
2920
2920
2930
2940
2940
2950
2955
85
87
88
89
90
90
90
92
92.5
0.83
0.87
0.87
0.85
0.89
0.90
0.85
0.89
0.89
11.3
14.3
18
21
27
33
41.5
53
65
7.0
7.0
7.5
7.3
8.8
8.8
7.5
7.5
7.5
2.6
2.6
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.2
2.3
3.4
3.2
3.6
3.3
3.8
3.8
3.8
2.4
2.5
0.014000
0.015000
0.020000
0.034000
0.053000
0.063000
0.093000
0.140000
0.160000
78
92
89
144
154
168
215
240
257
6.2
8.5
11
12.5
17
21
25
33
42
3480
3480
3500
3510
3520
3530
3530
3540
3550
11.3
14.3
18
21
27
33
41.5
52
65
45
7AT 225M-2
2950
93
0.90
77.5
7.5
2.3
2.5
0.260000
364
50
3540
77.5
55
75
7AT 250M-2
7AT 280S-2
2960
2970
94
94
0.88
0.89
96
129.5
7.3
7.5
2.2
2.2
2.8
2.8
0.340000
0.500000
416
575
62
85
3550
3550
96
130
90
7AT 280M-2
2970
94
0.89
155.5
7.5
2.2
2.8
0.550000
605
105
3550
156
110
132
160
7AT 315S-2
7AT 315M-2
7AT 315LA-2
2975
2980
2980
94.5
95
95
0.90
0.90
0.90
186
222
268
7.0
7.7
7.5
2.0
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.5
1.120000
1.280000
1.400000
840
885
935
124
149
180
3570
3575
3575
187
223
269
2p=4
1500 min-1
P
(kW)
Motor type
0.25
5AT 71A-4
1370
0.37
5AT 71B-4
1360
0.55
5AT 80A-4
1390
0.75
5AT 80B-4
1.1
5AT 90S-4
1.5
5AT 90L-4
1380
2.2
5AT 100LA-4
1410
81
0.80
4.9
5.0
2.2
5AT 100LB-4
1410
82.5
0.81
6.5
5.5
2.5
5AT 112M-4
1435
84.5
0.80
8.5
6.5
2.8
5.5
7AT 132S-4
1435
85.5
0.85
11
5.9
7.5
7AT 132M-4
1440
87
0.83
15
6.5
9.5
7AT 132MA-4
1440
88
0.82
19
11
7AT 160M-4
1460
88.6
0.82
22
15
7AT 160L-4
1460
89.7
0.83
29
7.0
18.5
7AT 180M-4
1460
90.5
0.83
35.5
7.5
2.7
3.1
0.130000
205
21
1750
35.5
22
7AT 180L-4
1460
91
0.84
41.5
7.5
2.8
3.1
0.160000
224
25
1750
41.5
55
n (min-1)
(%)
440V/60Hz/1800 min-1
400V/50Hz
Ik
In
Mk
Mn
Mmax
Mn
m (kg)
P (kW)
n (min-1)
In (A)
0.000600
10
0.3
1640
0.85
0.000850
10.7
0.4
1630
1.1
0.001500
13.8
0.6
1670
1.6
2.3
0.001600
14.4
0.8
1670
1.9
2.3
0.003300
18.1
1.2
1660
2.7
2.3
0.004100
21
1.7
1660
3.5
2.3
0.006500
26.7
2.5
1690
4.9
2.8
0.008750
28.8
3.4
1690
6.5
3.0
0.001130
39.8
4.5
1720
8.5
2.5
3.0
0.021000
87
6.2
1720
11
2.7
3.2
0.027000
89
8.5
1730
15
6.7
2.9
3.3
0.035000
93
11
1730
19
7.3
2.8
3.3
0.067000
154
12.5
1750
22
2.7
3.1
0.083000
170
17
1750
29
cos
In (A)
61
0.72
0.85
3.4
2.0
2.1
66
0.75
1.1
3.4
2.0
2.1
70
0.76
1.6
4.1
2.0
2.1
1390
75
0.76
1.9
4.1
2.2
1380
75.5
0.78
2.7
4.1
2.2
78
0.80
3.5
4.4
2.2
J (kgm2)
30
7AT 200L-4
1470
93.5
0.85
54.5
7.5
2.4
2.6
0.250000
269
34
1760
37
7AT 225S-4
1475
93.5
0.85
67
7.1
2.3
2.6
0.410000
359
42
1780
67
45
7AT 225M-4
1470
94.3
0.85
81
7.2
2.4
2.6
0.480000
391
52
1780
81
55
7AT 250M-4
1480
94.2
0.86
98
7.5
2.4
2.8
0.710000
469
63
1780
98
75
7AT 280S-4
1480
93.5
0.83
140
7.5
2.4
2.8
1.070000
595
85
1780
145
165
90
7AT 280M-4
1480
94.5
0.83
165
7.5
2.4
2.8
1.290000
655
103
1780
110
7AT 315S-4
1485
95
0.88
190
7.4
2.0
2.6
2.120000
920
124
1785
190
132
7AT 315M-4
1485
95
0.88
228
7.5
2.1
2.8
2.460000
985
149
1785
228
160
7AT 315LA-4
1485
95.5
0.88
275
7.5
2.1
2.8
3.090000
1020
180
1785
275
107

2p=6
1000 min-1
440V/60Hz/1200 min-1
400V/50Hz
P (kW)
Motor type
n
(min-1)
(%)
cos
In (A)
Ik
In
Mk
Mn
Mmax
Mn
J (kgm2)
m (kg)
P (kW)
n (min-1)
In (A)
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
5AT 71A-6
5AT 71B-6
5AT 80A-6
5AT 80B-6
5AT 90S-6
5AT 90L-6
5AT 100L-6
5AT 112M-6
7AT 132S-6
7AT 132MA-6
7AT 132MB-6
7AT 160M-6
7AT 160L-6
7AT 180L-6
7AT 200LA-6
7AT 200LB-6
7AT 225M-6
7AT 250M-6
7AT 280S-6
7AT 280M-6
7AT 315S-6
7AT 315M-6
7AT 315LA-6
870
880
900
900
900
900
910
930
940
950
950
965
965
970
970
975
975
985
985
985
990
990
990
51
53
65
67
70
73
76
78
81.5
83.1
84
86.5
88
90.5
90
91
92.5
93
93
93.5
94.5
94.5
95
0.67
0.65
0.75
0.77
0.65
0.68
0.80
0.72
0.72
0.70
0.74
0.81
0.82
0.84
0.80
0.82
0.83
0.75
0.77
0.77
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.7
2.4
3.2
3.6
5.7
7.4
9.7
12.8
15.5
22
28.5
37
42.5
56.5
78.5
90
110
143
172
208
2.2
2.5
3.5
3.4
3.2
3.2
4.0
5.3
4.6
5.5
5.8
7.0
7.0
7.8
6.5
6.1
7.3
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.3
7.5
7.6
1.6
1.7
1.7
2.1
2.2
2.0
1.9
2.7
2.1
2.7
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.7
2.2
2.2
3.0
2.8
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.1
2.1
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.3
2.1
2.1
3.1
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.2
3.2
3.6
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.6
2.7
2.7
0.000600
0.000850
0.001400
0.002000
0.003300
0.004300
0.007000
0.013000
0.030000
0.037000
0.045000
0.095000
0.120000
0.200000
0.310000
0.310000
0.520000
0.780000
1.140000
1.360000
2.290000
2.740000
3.300000
9.9
10.6
13.5
14.1
17.6
20.6
26.7
36.7
87
87
89
151
173
195
252
281
392
426
555
595
840
905
1000
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.7
2.5
3.4
4.5
6.2
8.2
12.5
17
21
25
34
42
50
60
84
101
124
1040
1060
1080
1080
1080
1080
1090
1110
1130
1140
1140
1160
1160
1160
1170
1170
1170
1180
1180
1180
1185
1185
1185
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.7
2.4
3.2
3.6
5.7
7.4
9.7
12.8
15.5
22
28.5
37
42.5
56.8
78.5
90
110
143
172
208
750 min-1
2p=8
108
440V/60Hz/900 min-1
400V/50Hz
P (kW)
Motor type
n
(min-1)
(%)
cos
In (A)
Ik
In
Mk
Mn
Mmax
Mn
J (kgm2)
m (kg)
P (kW)
n (min-1)
In (A)
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
5AT 71A-8
5AT 71B-8
5AT 80A-8
5AT 80B-8
5AT 90S-8
5AT 90L-8
5AT 100LA-8
5AT 100LB-8
5AT 112M-8
7AT 132S-8
7AT 132M-8
7AT 160MA-8
7AT 160MB-8
7AT 160L-8
7AT 180L-8
7AT 200L-8
7AT 225S-8
7AT 225M-8
7AT 250M-8
7AT 280S-8
7AT 280M-8
7AT 315S-8
7AT 315M-8
7AT 315LA-8
660
660
700
680
690
670
700
700
680
690
690
710
710
720
720
730
735
735
735
735
735
740
740
740
43
43
60
60
58
60
65
73
72
78
78
85
85
86
88
90
91
91
92
92
92.5
93.5
94.0
94.3
0.53
0.54
0.58
0.61
0.57
0.58
0.60
0.62
0.70
0.78
0.76
0.73
0.75
0.78
0.80
0.78
0.78
0.78
0.78
0.79
0.79
0.81
0.82
0.82
0.60
0.75
0.75
1.05
1.7
2.2
2.8
3.5
4.3
5.2
7.4
9.7
13
16.5
24
31
38
45
60
75
90
105
141
168
2.0
2.0
3.0
2.6
2.5
2.8
3.1
3.7
3.8
4.2
4.2
4.8
5.1
5.5
5.6
5.8
5.9
5.9
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.5
5.5
5.3
1.8
2.0
2.3
1.7
1.7
2.0
1.8
2.1
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.3
1.9
2.0
2.0
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.6
2.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.3
2.1
2.4
2.7
2.7
2.6
2.8
2.4
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.3
0.000600
0.000850
0.001400
0.001400
0.002800
0.003500
0.007000
0.011000
0.013000
0.030000
0.040000
0.060000
0.095000
0.140000
0.022000
0.320000
0.460000
0.530000
0.860000
1.200000
1.400000
2.120000
2.750000
3.320000
9.9
10.6
13.4
14
17.6
20.6
26.4
29.8
38
83
82
134
154
169
225
255
327
349
421
560
595
805
895
980
0.09
0.12
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.7
2.5
3.4
4.5
6.2
8.5
12.5
17
21
25
34
40
50
62
85
102
790
790
840
820
830
810
840
840
820
830
830
850
850
860
860
880
880
880
880
880
880
890
890
890
0.60
0.75
0.75
1.05
1.7
2.2
2.8
3.5
4.3
5.2
7.4
9.7
13
16.5
24
31
38
45
60
75
90
105
141
168
Ik/In - Startverhltnis der Strme (Verhltnis des

Anlaufs-u.Nennstroms beim Nennmoment)
Ik/In - odnos struja kod pokretanja (odnos struje

kratkog spoja i nazivne struje kod nazivnog
momenta)
Ik/In - ratio of currents during starting (ratio

between locked rotor current and rated current
at rated torque)
Mk/Mn - odnos momenta kod pokretanja

(odnos momenta u kratkom spoju i nazivnog
momenta motora)
Mk/Mn - ratio of torques during starting (ratio

between locked rotor torque and rated torque)
Mk/Mn - Startverhltnis der Momente

(Verhltnis des Anlaufs-u.Nennmoments) Verhltnis des Kipp-u. Nennmoments
Mmax/Mn - relation beween breakdown torque

and full load torque
Mmax/Mn - Verhltnis
Nennmoments
Remark: multi-speed and higher power rated

motors in specific frame size are made on
request. Other data for 440V/60Hz can be used
from table with data for 400V/50Hz.
Bemerkung: Mehrtourige Motoren und Motoren mit progressiver Leistung mit jeweiligen
Achshhen, fertigt man auf Sonderanfrage. Andere Daten fr 440V, 60Hz bitte der Tabelle fr
400V, 50 Hz entnehmen.
Mmax/Mn -odnos maksimalnog momenta i

nazivnog momenta motora
Opaska: - motori s vie brzina vrtnje i veim
snagama u pojedinim osnim visinama, izrauju
se na poseban upit.Ostale podatke za 440V,
60Hz koristiti iz tablice za 400V, 50Hz.
des
Kipp-
u.

SERIJA 5AT I 7AT
SERIES 5AT AND 7AT
BAUREIHEN 5AT UND 7AT
MOTORI S NOGAMA
MOTORS WITH MOUNTED FEET
FUMOTOREN

IM B3, IM B5, IM B14
AC
D/DA
DZ/
DY
E/
EA
F/
FA
GA/
GC
HD
LB
LC
LD
LE
LF
5AT 71
5AT 80
5AT 90S
5AT 90L
5AT 100
5AT 112
7AT 132S
7AT 132M
7AT 160M
7AT 160L
7AT 180M
7AT 180L
7AT 200
7AT 225S
7AT 225M - 2
4-8
7AT 250M - 2
4-8
7AT 280M - 2
4-8
7AT 315S - 2
4-8
7AT 315M - 2
4-8
7AT 315LA - 2
4-8
139
14j6
M5
30
156
19j6
M6
40
16
164
249
22
135
135
285
269
112
33
140
90
110
45
21,5
178
281
32
135
135
315
301
125
37
160
100
125
50
176
24j6
M8
50
27
184
304
29
135
135
360
324
140
42
180
100
125
56
176
24j6
M8
50
27
184
329
39
135
135
385
349
140
42
180
125
150
194
28j6
M10
60
31
184
373
38
135
135
440
393
160
47
200
140
175
218
28j6
M10
60
31
195
399
46
135
135
465
419
258
38k6
M12
80
10
41
264
515
44
170
180
600
545
258
38k6
M12
80
10
41
264
515
44
170
180
600
545
318
42k6
M16
110
12
45
300
650
47
210
220
757
667
318
42k6
M16
110
12
45
300
650
47
210
220
757
667
348
48k6
M16
110
14
51,5
320
705
66
210
220
815
735
348
48k6
M16
110
14
51,5
320
705
66
210
220
815
735
391
55m6
M20
110
16
59
355
790
63
250
275
903
880
60m6
M20
370
865
65
250
275
1010
960
950
930
1010
960
425
425
471
533
611
55m6
60m6
60m6
65m6
65m6
75m6
65m6
80m6
65m6
80m6
65m6
80m6
140
18
64
110
16
59
140
18
64
M20
140
18
M20
140
M20
M20
M20
M20
64
69
18
69
20
79,5
140
18
69
170
22
85
140
18
69
170
22
85
140
18
69
170
22
85
370
835
865
65
250
275
415
910
64
280
305
1055 1010
730
1040
65
280
305
1185 1150
72
340
365
72
340
365
72
340
365
490
490
490
1260
1290
1260
1290
1260
1290
1405 1370
1465 1400
1405 1370
1465 1400
1405 1370
1465 1400
Vidi TEHNIKA RAZJANJENJA (uvodnice) See TECHNICAL EXPLANATIONS (cable glands)

Siehe technische Erluterungen(Kabelverschraubungen)
110
Type
IM B3 / IM 1001
A
AA AB
BB
HA
71
80
10
90
12
56
90
12
63
100
14
13
190
48
220
140
175
70
112
15
13
216
50
260
140
218
89
132
18
13
216
50
260
178
218
89
132
18
13
254
62
320
210
304 108 160
25
15
254
62
320
254
304 108 160
25
15
279
65
350
241
334 121 180
28
15
279
65
350
279
334 121 180
28
15
318
75
398
305
360 133 200
30
18,5
356
82
436
286
370 149 225
30
18,5
356
82
436
311
370 149 225
30
18,5
406
100 500
349
415 168 250
35
24
457
112 555
490 190 280
40
24
508
120 628
406
535 216 315
45
28
508
120 628
457
535 216 315
45
28
508
120 628
508
586 216 315
45
28
368
419

SERIJA 5AT I 7AT

MOTORI S PRIRUBNICOM
IM B5
SERIES 5AT AND 7AT
BAUREIHEN 5AT UND 7AT
FLANGE MOUTNED MOTORS
FLANSCHMOTOREN
IM B14
IEC 71 - 200
IEC 225 - 280
Type
5AT 71
5AT 80
5AT 90S, L
5AT 100, 112
7AT 132
7AT 160, 180
7AT 200
7AT 225
7AT 250, 280
7AT 315
LA
11
13
13
15
14
15
20
22
22
25
M
130
165
165
215
265
300
350
400
500
600
IM B5 / IM 3001
N
P
S
T
110 j6 160
9
3
130 j6 200 11 3,5
130 j6 200 11 3,5
180 j6 250 15
4
180 j6 250 14
4
250 j6 350 18
5
300 j6 400 18,5 5
350 j6 450 18,5 5
450 j6 550 19
5
550 j6 660 24
6
LA
11
13
13
15
16
IM B14 - smaller / IM 3601

M
N
P
S
T
85 70 j6 105 M6
3
100 80 j6 120 M6 3,5
115 95 j6 140 M8 3,5
130 110 j6 160 M8 3,5
215 110 j6 250 M12 4
LA
11
13
13
15
IM B14 - bigger / IM 3601

M
N
P
S
115 95 j6 140 M8
130 110 j6 160 M8
130 110 j6 160 M8
165 130 j6 200 M10
T
3,5
3,5
3,5
3,5
111

112
IEC veliina
IEC frame size
IEC Baugre
71 112 (5AT serija)

132 315 (7AT serija)
71 112 (5AT series)

132 - 315 (7AT series)
71 112 (5AT Baureihe)

132 - 315 (7AT Baureihe)
Popis rezervnih dijelova s uputom za

naruivanje nalazi se u poglavlju 6.3.
Rezervni dijelovi.
Spare part list with ordering instructions is

given in chapter 6.3. Spare parts.
Die
Liste
der
Ersatzteile
und
Bestellungsanweisung befinden sich im
Kapitel 6.3 Ersatzteile.
Svi navedeni tehniki podaci su informativni

te za njih proizvoa Konar-MES pridrava
pravo promjene bez prethodne najave.
All technical data are informative and

manufacturer Konar-MES reserves right to
their change without prior notice.
Alle technischen Daten sind informativ

und der Hersteller Konar-MES behlt das
nderungsrecht ohne Vorankuendigung.
04
Swagelok
Relief valve
SS-8CPA2-50
One-Piece,
Pipe-Ended Adjustable
Check Valves
CPA Series
Working pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar)
Cracking pressures adjustable from 3 to 600 psi (0.2 to 41.3 bar)
NPT and ISO pipe end connections in 1/4 and 1/2 in. sizes
316 stainless steel and brass materials
www.swagelok.com
CPA Series Check Valves
Features
Fully
contained
O-ring seal
Adjustable
spring
Adjusting screw
sets cracking
pressure
Locking screw
maintains
setting
Patented
Compact, one-piece body
Series
Cracking
Pressure
Ranges,
psi (bar)
4CPA
8CPA
3 to 50
50 to 150
150 to 350
350 to 600
Cracking and Reseal Pressures

at 70F (20C)
Reseal Pressure, bar
(0.2 to 3.4)
(3.4 to 10.3)
(10.3 to 24.1)
(24.1 to 41.3)
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
600
40
550
36
Temperature
Rating, F (C)
Flow Coefficient
(see Flow Data)
3000 (206)
Fluorocarbon FKM O-ring: 10 to 375 (23 to 190)

Buna N O-ring: 10 to 250 (23 to 121)
0.35
1.20
Cracking Pressure, psi
500
Working and
Back Pressures
at 70F (20C),
psig (bar)
32
450
400
350
300
al
se
Re
250
g
an
eR
ur
s
es
Pr
28
24
20
16
200
12
150
Cracking Pressure, bar
Technical Data
100
50
390
450
0
50
Testing
Every CPA series check valve is factory tested for crack and
reseal performance.
Cleaning and Packaging

Every CPA series check valve is cleaned and packaged in
accordance with Swagelok Specification SC-10. Special
cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok
Specification SC-11 is available as an option.
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
Reseal Pressure, psi

Back Pressure
Example: For a valve set to crack at 450 psi (31.0 bar), the minimum reseal
pressure would be 390 psi (26.8 bar).
Valves that are not actuated for a period of time may crack initially at
higher than subsequent cracking pressures.
CPA series check valves set to crack at 20 psi (1.3 bar) or lower may require
back pressure to reseal bubble-tight.
Cracking pressure the upstream pressure at which the first indication of flow
occurs.
Reseal pressure the upstream pressure at which there is no indication of
flow.
CPA Series Check Valves
1
Valve Body Materials

Brass
Stainless Steel
Component
1 Insert lock screw
4CPA
8CPA

316 SS/A479
2 Insert
Brass 360/
B16 or B345
Brass 485/B21
3 O-ring
Fluorocarbon FKM
Buna N
4 Poppet
316 SS/A479
Brass 360/B16
5 Spring
302 SS/A313
6 Body
316 SS/A479
7 Adjusting screw
316
8 Locking screw
Brass 360/B16
SS/A479
Brass
316 SS/A479
Silicone-based lubricant.
Molybdenum disulfide-based dry film lubricant.
Adjusting screw in brass 8CPA2 valve
with 150 or 350 psig spring is 316SS.
360/B16
Flow Data at 70F (20C)

Air Flow
Water Flow
4CPA Series
4CPA Series
Water Flow, L/min
Air Flow, std L/min

0
400
800
1200
1600
2000
2400
2800
800
600
Nominal Cracking Pressures
40
50
700
30
50 psi (3.4 bar)
300
20
350 psi (24.1 bar)
300
150 psi (10.3 bar)
10
3 psi (0.2 bar)
50 psi (3.4 bar)
10
100
3 psi (0.2 bar)

20
80
60
40
Air Flow, std
0
100
0
0
0.2
0.4
ft3/min
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Water Flow, U.S. gal/min
8CPA Series
8CPA Series
Air Flow, std L/min
400
800
1200
1600
Water Flow, L/min

2000
2400
2800
12
16
20
600
800
50
700
40
500
30
350 psi (24.1 bar)
400
300
20
150 psi (10.3 bar)
200
50 psi (3.4 bar)

3 psi (0.2 bar)
100
10
Pressure Drop, psig
40
Inlet Pressure, bar
500
600
350 psi (24.1 bar)
30
400
300
20
150 psi (10.3 bar)

200
50 psi (3.4 bar)
Pressure Drop, bar
20
200
200
100
Inlet Pressure, psig
30
400
Pressure Drop, bar
150 psi (10.3 bar)
400
Pressure Drop, psi
500
40
Inlet Pressure, bar
Inlet Pressure, psig
500
350 psi (24.1 bar)
600
10
100
3 psi (0.2 bar)

20
40
60
Air Flow, std ft3/min
80
0
100
0
0
Water Flow, U.S. gal/min
Options
Dimensions
Seal Materials
A
D
Size
1/4 in.
Basic
Ordering
Number
SS-4CPA4-
A
2.98 (75.7)
D Hex
3/4
1/4 in.
SS-4CPA2-
1.62 (41.1)
9/16
1/2 in.
SS-8CPA2-
2.56 (65.0)
7/8
1/4 in.
SS-4CPA2-RT-
1.62 (41.1)
9/16
1/2 in.
SS-8CPA2-RT-
2.56 (65.0)
7/8
End Connections
Type
Female NPT
Male NPT
Male ISO
Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard in 316 stainless steel

valves; Buna N O-rings are standard in brass valves. Other
O-ring materials are available. To order, insert the desired seal
designator into the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-4CPA4-KZ-50.
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Dimensions in inches and (millimeters) are for reference only and are subject to
change.
Reference specifications: ISO 7/1, BS21, DIN-2999, JIS B0203.
For a complete ordering number, add the desired cracking
pressure designator as a suffix to the basic ordering number.
Example: SS-4CPA4-50.
Cracking Pressure Range, psi (bar) Designator
3 to 50 (0.2 to 3.4)
3
50 to 150 (3.4 to 10.3)
50
150 to 350 (10.3 to 24.1)
150
350 to 600 (24.1 to 41.3)
350
Basic ordering numbers specify stainless steel material. For

brass material, substitute designator B for SS in the ordering
number.
Example: B-4CPA4-50.
Seal
Material
Fluorocarbon FKM
Designator
-VI
Temperature Rating,
F (C)
10 to 375 (23 to 190)
Buna N
-BU
10 to 250 (23 to 121)
Ethylene propylene
-EP
50 to 300 (45 to 148)
Neoprene
-NE
40 to 250 (40 to 121)
Kalrez
-KZ
10 to 375 (23 to 190)
PTFE
-TR
50 to 350 (45 to 176)
PTFE requires high back pressure to seal leaktight.
PTFE-Coated Springs
Springs with PTFE coating are available. To order, insert
designator -TS into the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-4CPA4-TS-150.
Special Alloys
Valve bodies of other alloys are available in some sizes.
Contact your Swagelok representative for more information.
Deflector Cap
Polyethylene deflector cap deflects flow from direct
contact with personnel and prevents atmospheric
contaminants from entering the valve. The
deflector cap screws easily onto the male NPT
outlet end of the valve.
Pressure rating: 300 psig (20.6 bar).
Temperature rating: 100F (37C).
To order, insert -DG for a green cap or -DR for a
red cap into the ordering number.
Example: SS-4CPA4-DR-150.
Maintenance Kits
Spring kits and seal kits are available for retrofit or
maintenance. See Swagelok Check Valve Maintenance Kits,
MS-02-115-SCS.
Safe Product Selection

When selecting products, the total system design must
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance.
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings,
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the
responsibilities of the system designer and user.
Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of
other manufacturers.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company

KalrezTM DuPont
2000 Swagelok Company
Printed in U.S.A., MI
August 2000, R3
MS-01-20
06
Classic
Fast loop filter

SF215.421/25.64S100V
07
Brooks
Fast loop flowmeter

MT-3809

p p
pp
p
p
p p

p p
p p
p p

p p p p

p p p p

08
Sentry
Cooler
TSF4225
Compact, efficient sample cooling for gases and liquids

Single helical coil design
Wide variety of exotic
alloys for corrosion
resistance
The TSF series sample cooler is a compact sample cooler

that provides broad application flexibility through the use
of a variety of sample tube materials. Optimal service for
flows below 1200 ccm for single phase heat transfer.
Standard tube side materials are 316SS, Inconel 625
and Hastelloy C. Special materials include Alloy 20,
Titanium, Zirconium and variety of nickel alloys (see spec
sheet 4.8).
Specifications - TSF Series

Model No.
Shell Design
Tube Design
Tube
Material
Shell
Material
TSF4225
450 psi @ 650F

31 bar @ 343C
5000 psi @ 1000F

344 bar @537C
316SS
1/4" O.D. x 0.042"MW
TSF4225U
450 psi @ 650F

31 bar @ 343C
4400 psi @ 1000F

303 bar @ 537C
TSF42B5
450 psi @ 650F

31 bar @ 343C
TSF42B5U
Part
Number
Area
Weight
304/316SS
1.2 ft
0.11 m
10 lbs
4.5 kg
7-00687A
316SS
1/4" O.D. x 0.042"MW
304/316SS
1.2 ft
0.11 m
10 lbs
4.5 kg
7-00686C
5000 psi @ 1100F

344 bar @ 593C
Inconel 625
1/4" O.D. x 0.035"AW
304/316SS
1.2 ft
0.11 m
10 lbs
4.5 kg
7-00687H
450 psi @ 650F

31 bar @ 343C
5000 psi @ 1100F

344 bar @ 593C
Inconel 625
1/4" O.D. x 0.035"AW
304/316SS
1.2 ft
0.11 m
10 lbs
4.5 kg
7-00687J
TSF44B5
150 psi @ 250F

10 bar @ 121C
5000 psi @ 1100F

344 bar @ 593C
Inconel 625
1/4" O.D. x 0.035"AW
Cupro-Nickel
1.2 ft
0.11 m
11 lbs
5 kg
7-00693F
TSF4271
450 psi @ 600F

31 bar @ 315C
1000 psi @ 600F

68 bar @ 315C
Hastelloy C276
1/4" O.D. x 0.035"AW
304/316SS
1.2 ft
0.11 m
10 lbs
4.5 kg
7-00899C
NOTE:
Canadian Registration Number available for most models. Consult factory for CRN and other options and information.
U in model number denotes ASME stamped model.
Vessels are exempt from CE marking per PED 97/23/EC. Vessels are below or equal to the limits set forth in Article 3, Sections 1.1, 1.2,
1.3 and Section 2 as applicable, and are designed and manufactured in accordance with sound engineering practice (meets the general
requirements of the ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Boiler And Pressure Vessel Code). Nameplate will bear the name of Sentry
Equipment Corp. and safety instructions will be included per Article 3, Section 2.
www.sentry-equip.com
4.2 Rev. 0 5/03
SENTRY SAMPLE COOLER - TSF DATA SHEET (Standard Materials)
TSF SAMPLE COOLER (standard materials)
Performance Curve - Water

Model TSF-4225
Note:
Not recommended for steam
condensing service. See TLF, FLF,
FXF series sample coolers for this
application.
Surface Area 1.2 Ft.2 [0.11 m2]

5 GPM [18.9 L/min] Cooling Water at 95oF [35oC]
3 PSI [0.20 Bar] Pressure Drop
40
re
Dr
op
(P
SI
)
35
0o
C
50
0o
F
30
50
10
25
40
00
(2
04
C)
20
30
20
10
15
20
15
1 PSI = 0.069 Bar
su
Pressure Drop (PSI)
re
s
eP
60
0o
F
60
pl
(2
6
45
(3
16 o
C)
80
371 o
C)
50
Sa
700 o
F(
90
70
55
Approach Temperature (oC)
Approach Temperature (oF)
100
C)
49
o
10
30
o (
0F
o C)
o F (93
o
20 0
o
C)
. 150 F (66
mp
Inlet Te
25
30
400
600
0.1
800
0.2
60
80
1000
1200
CCM
1400
0.3
GPM
1600
0.4
1800
2000
0.5
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
Lbm/Hr
Flow Rate
SENTRY Equipment Corp

856 E. Armour Rd.
PO Box 127
Oconomowoc, WI 53066 USA
Phone: 262-567-7256
Fax: 262-567-4523
E-mail:
sales@sentry-equip.com
Website:
www.sentry-equip.com
For further information, contact:
09
Swagelok
Pressure regulator
KPR1ERL422A20000
www.swagelok.com
P re s s u re R e g u l a t o r s
Pressure-reducing models
Back-pressure models
Gas cylinder changeover model
Vaporizing models
Pressure Regulators
Swagelok Pressure Regulator Features

Stem
Fine-pitch threads
enable precise spring
adjustment with low torque.
Stop Plate
This disc is braced by the cap
shoulder to protect against a
ruptured diaphragm.
Range Spring
Turning the handle compresses
the spring, pushing the poppet
away from the seat and
increasing outlet pressure.
Convoluted Diaphragm
The all-metal diaphragm acts as
the sensing mechanism between
the inlet pressure and the range
spring. The convoluted,
nonperforated design ensures
greater sensitivity and longer life.
A piston sensing mechanism
(shown below) can
accommodate higher pressures.
Two-Piece Cap
The two-piece design provides
linear load on the diaphragm
seal when the cap ring is
tightened, eliminating torque
damage to the diaphragm
during assembly.
Inlet
Gauze Inlet Filter
Regulators are susceptible to
damage from system particles.
Swagelok pressure-reducing
regulators include a 25 m filter
that is held in the inlet port with a
retaining ring to prevent it from
accidentally falling out. It can be
removed easily for cleaning or to
use the regulator in liquid service.
Filter
Filter
Ring Retaining
Ring
Outlet
Poppet Damper
The poppet damper keeps the
poppet aligned and reduces
vibration and resonance.
Venting Options
The self-vent option allows excess outlet pressure to vent through the body
cap. This can occur when downstream flow is suddenly reduced or when the
handle is adjusted to a lower pressure with little or no flow downstream.
The captured-vent option includes a 1/8 in. female NPT connection and stem
seal in the body cap to allow monitoring of the diaphragm or piston sensing
mechanism. It also allows containment of hazardous gas or liquid media.
Self-vent and captured-vent options can be ordered together so that
hazardous gas or liquid media can be contained if vented.
The captured-vent port is in the bottom of the KHR series body.
Piston Sensing Mechanism

Piston sensing mechanisms
typically are used to regulate
higher pressures than a diaphragm
can withstand. They are also more
resistant to damage caused by
pressure spikes and have a short
stroke to maximize cycle life.
Fully-Contained Piston
The piston is contained
by a shoulder in the
regulator body cap to
prevent piston blowout if
the regulator outlet is
overpressurized.
Pressure Regulators
General-Purpose Diaphragm-Sensing,
Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KPR Series)
The KPR series is a compact regulator with excellent accuracy, sensitivity, and set-point
pressure stability.
Features
Convoluted, nonperforated diaphragm
Flow Coefficient (Cv )
Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal
0.06 and 0.20
Low internal volume

Two-piece cap design provides linear
load on the diaphragm seal

High-flow, dual-gauze type filter
positively retained in inlet port
Technical Data
Maximum Inlet Pressure
3600 psig (248 bar)
Pressure Control Ranges

0 to 10 psig (0.68 bar) through
See page 41 for flow graphs.

0.02 and 0.50 also available
Maximum Operating Temperature

176F (80C) with PCTFE seat
392F (200C) with PEEK seat
Weight
2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Ports
1/4 in. female NPT inlet, outlet, and
gauge ports
0 to 500 psig (34.4 bar)
316 SS
Cover
Stem nut
Stem
Spring button
Stop plate
Range spring
Cap ring
Body cap
Seat retainer
Diaphragm
Poppet
Seat
Poppet spring
Inlet
Filter,
filter ring,
retaining ring
Outlet
Poppet
damper
Body
Alloy 400/
R-405
Alloy
C-276
Component
Material
Knob handle, cover
Nylon with 316 SS insert
Spring button
316 SS (0 to 500 psig range)

Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges)
Spring stabilizer
301 SS
Range spring
316 SS
(0 to 10 through 0 to 100 psig control ranges)
Zinc-plated steel
(0 to 250 and 0 to 500 psig control ranges)
Stem, stem nut,

cap ring, stop plate,
body cap,
panel nuts
316 SS
Nonwetted lubricant
Hydrocarbon-based
Knob handle
Spring
stabilizer
Brass
CW721R
Seat retainer
Seat
Filter, retaining ring
Alloy C-276
Alloy X-750 or alloy C-276

Alloy 400/
R-405
S17400 SS
Poppet spring
Body
Wetted lubricant
Alloy
C-276
Alloy
C-276
Alloy X-750
Poppet damper,
filter ring
Self-vent seal
Alloy
C-276
PCTFE or PEEK
316 SS
Diaphragm
Poppet
Alloy 400/
R-405
316 SS
PTFE
Fluorocarbon FKM
316 SS
Brass
CW721R
Alloy 400/
R-405
Alloy
C-276
PTFE-based

Not included in regulators with 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar) control range.
Regulators with control range 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) and 0.20 Cv have
zinc-plated steel range spring.
Not shown.
Regulators with control ranges higher than 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) are
assembled with two diaphragms.
Pressure Regulators
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Panel 0.39 (10.0) thick maximum with 2 lock nuts
Panel 0.63 (16.0) thick maximum with 1 lock nut
Panel cutout 1.38 (35.0) dia
2.13
2.16
(54.0)
(55.0)
dia
dia
0.75
0.75
(19.0)
(19.0)
4.61
5.00
Mounting holes
10-32, 0.33 deep
(M5 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(117)
(127)
Build a KPR series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
KPR 1
4 Body Material
8 Ports
13 Isolation and Relief Valves
1
2
4
5
A
B
4 = 1/4 in. female NPT

9 Seat Material
0 = No valves
For isolation and relief valve options,
see page 54.
1 = PCTFE
2 = PEEK
14 Cylinder Connections
=
=
=
=
=
=
316 SS
Brass CW721R
Alloy 400/R-405
Alloy C-276
316 SS, ASTM G93-cleaned
Brass, ASTM G93-cleaned
10 Flow Coefficient (Cv )

5 Pressure Control Range
C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar)
D = 0 to 25 psig (0 to 1.7 bar)
E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 3.4 bar)
F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)
G = 0 to 250 psig (0 to 17.2 bar)
J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar)
6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
P = 3000 psig (206 bar)

R = 3600 psig (248 bar)
Substantially lower inlet pressures may result in
increased sensitivity when making handle
adjustments. Contact your authorized Swagelok
representative for more information.
Required when ordering regulators assembled
with CGA cylinder connection or inlet hose.
7 Port Configuration
A, B, C, F, H, K, L
See Port Configurations, page 52.
1 = 0.02
2 = 0.06
5 = 0.20
7 = 0.50
11 Sensing Mechanism, Vent
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent

C = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self vent
E = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, captured
vent
F = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self and
captured vent
H = Alloy C-276 diaphragm, no vent
Available only with 316 SS and brass body
materials and 0.06 and 0.20 Cv.
12 Handle, Mounting
2 = Knob
3 = 316 SS antitamper nut
6 = Knob, panel mount
7 = 316 SS antitamper nut, panel mount
0 = No connections
For CGA cylinder connection options,
see page 53.
15 Gauges
0 = No gauges
For inlet and outlet gauge options, see
page 54.
16 Options
0 = No options
H = Inboard helium leak test to a
maximum leak rate of
1 105 std ft3/min
3 = 3 ft, 1/4 in. FM series metal flexible
hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet
4 = 3 ft, 1/4 in. TH series PTFE-lined,
stainless steel braided hose, 1/4 in.
female NPT inlet
For more information about hoses, see
page 56.
52
Pressure Regulators
Port Configurations
Select regulators are available on special order with additional port configurations.
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
Port Configuration Symbols

These symbols indicate the port location of factory-assembled accessories.
Gi Inlet gauge
Flow Symbols
R Relief valve
Go Outlet gauge
I Isolation valve
Go/R Outlet gauge or

relief valve
Pressure-Reducing Regulators
Configuration
Designator
Flow direction
C Cylinder connection
Filtered inlet
ports
Back-Pressure Regulators
Configuration
Designator
MPC Port Configurations

Configuration
Designator
Inlet Outlet
2-Port
Gi
I
Outlet
Outlet
Go/R
6
Inlet
3-Port
Go/R
I
C
Gi
Outlet Inlet
7
Gi
Go
I
2-Port
L
R
Inlet
Inlet
Outlet
Go
Gi
Go
Gi
H
R
Go
I
Gi
C
3-Port
! Swagelok pressure regulators are not Safety
Accessories as defined in the Pressure Equipment

Directive 97/23/EC.
! Do not use the regulator as a shutoff device.
Safe Product Selection

When selecting a product, the total system design must
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance.
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings,
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the
responsibilities of the system designer and user.
Caution: Do not mix or interchange regulator
components with those of other manufacturers.
Swagelok, KenmacTM Swagelok Company

ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Limited Partnership
KalrezTM DuPont
2005 Swagelok Company
Printed in U.S.A., GLI
February 2005, R0
MS-02-230
10
IFG de Wit
Pressure indicator
91/63.0-4
12
E.I.F.
Coalescer filter
3S1NL1 SEC HV-6H
Liquid / Liquid
DECLIFHP
mini
TECNICAL
DATA
F
I C H E TECHNIQUE
DCOLMATEUR
LIQUID
/ LIQUID
INOX
SEPARATION
POUR CARTER
BY COALESCING
LIF MINI
AND MEMBRANE
FILTRATE OUTLET
DRAIN
INLET
200 SNLI-SEC-HV
320 -SQLI-SEC-HV
75
64
APPLICATION:
EXISTING HOUSING
3S1QLI SEC HV
3S1NLI SEC HV
Inlet NPTF
Outlet NPTF
Drain NPTF
S QLI
OPTION:
S NLI
Technical Data:
Ra 1.6 Other on request
ACCESSORIES:
Inlet flow
50 l/H
20 l/H
Outlet flow
40 l/H
15 l/H
Drain
10 l/H
5 l/H
Volume
355 mL
140 mL
Weight
2500 gr
1950 gr
Max. pressure
40 bar
40 bar
Max. Delta P
2 Bar
2 Bar
Temperature
110C
110C
Material
ST/ST
ST/ST
FPM / PTFE
FPM / PTFE
Seals
Two liquids phase separation
Mounting bracket
Mounting bracket
MB21
MB 5
SQLI
SNLI
FLUID:
Liquids.
SPARE PARTS
Cartridge
Membrane
Seal kit
Disc Support
QLI
6 C 10 070
6 H 10 -070
SEC 50 HV
PJ NQLISECHV
1005
NLI
6 C 10 - 025
6 H 10 - 025
IDEM
IDEM
IDEM
97 rue Pierre de Montreuil 93100 Montreuil / bois Data N 2095a

Tl.: 01 48 70 40 30
Fax: 01 48 58 63 82
Email eif.filtres@eif.fr
REV 00
Site eif-filtres.com
Date
29/09/04
Liquid / Liquid
TECHNICAL DATA
LIQUID/LIQUID SEPARATION BY COALESCING AND MEMBRANE

APPLICATION:
Two liquids phase separation.
OPTION:
Ra 1.6 Other on request
ACCESSORIES
Mounting bracket MB 20 (PVC)
FLUID:
EXISTING HOUSING
3S1WLI SEC HV
3S1VLI SEC HV
Liquids.
SPARE PARTS
Inlet NPTF
Outlet NPTF
Drain NPTF
SWLI
Cartridge
Membrane
Seals kit
Disc support
SVLI
6 H 04 - 023
SEC25 HV
PJ VWLISECHV
1006
6 H 04010
IDEM
IDEM
IDEM
Technical data:
45
SW
SV
Inlet flow
12 l/H
5 l/H
Outlet flow
10 l/H
4 l/H
Drain
2 l/H
1 l/H
Volume
40 mL
25 mL
Weight
245 gr
200 gr
Max. pressure
100 bar
100 Bar
Max. Delta P
2 bar
2 bar
Temperature
110C
110c
Material
ST/ST
ST/ST
FPM / PTFE
FPM / PTFE
DISMANTLING LENGHTH
155 SVLI
INLET
185 SWLI
DRAIN
95 SVLI
125 SWLI
40
OUTLET
Seals
97 rue Pierre de Montreuil 93100 Montreuil / bois Data N 2095a

Tl.: 01 48 70 40 30
Fax: 01 48 58 63 82
Email eif.filtres@eif.fr
REV 00
Site eif-filtres.com
Date
29/09/04
13
ABB
Flow meter
A6121B083INA2BAS
Data Sheet
Purgemaster 'SNAP-IN' Small Flowmeter
SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Models A6100 & A6200
High strength stainless steel body

the body is corrosion resistant stainless steel,
rigidly constructed to maintain tube alignment and
resist pipe strain
'SNAP-IN' tube construction
minimizes the downtime needed to clean the meter
tube or to change the meter range
Polycarbonate operator protection shield
safety tested shield protects personnel from glass
fragments in the rare event of accidental tube
breakage
Component flexibility
all parts for the three scale lengths except bodies,
tubes and protector shields are interchangeable
Internal backcheck
restricts back flow and draining of process fluid
when metering tube is removed
Choice of operating position
the meter can be inverted and its tube reversed to
change the control valve position from the inlet to
the outlet
Options of valve, DP regulator and alarms
ATEX-approved versions available both with and
without alarms
II 2GD approval without alarms; II 2G approval with
alarms
Long-term reliable performance

flowmeters with low
cost-of-ownership

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Introduction
ABB Purgemaster Flowmeters are low capacity variable area
flowmeters for both liquid and gas with an excellent selection of
material and scale lengths in a single product family design. They
provide optimum flexibility with a minimum number of
components. The meter features a corrosion resistant, high
strength stainless steel body, quick, easy snap-in tube
construction and a safety tested operator protection shield.
ABB Purgemasters are ideal for applications such as the purging
of control lines and instrument enclosures. Their use is easily
extended into fluid sampling, liquid specific gravity, level
measurement and similar services.
Permissible operating pressures kPa (bar)

Material
Scale length
(in.)
Brass
Fluid Temperature
Max.
Design
Max.
Design
11/2 to 3
120 C
(248 F)
1800 (18)
38 C
(100 F)
1800 (18)
95 C
(203 F)
1400 (14)
38 C
(100 F)
1800 (18)
5 to 10
1800 (18)
1800 (18)
1400 (14)
1800 (18)
Materials
Specification
Measuring ranges
See measuring range tables on pages 3, 4 and 5
Rangeability
Wetted Parts Standard
Options
Measuring
Tube
Float
10:1
Scale design
Borosilicate glass
Glass (BG)
/16 in. Sapphire (SA)
316 Stainless Steel
% or direct reading scales
Accuracy classes (VDE/VDI 3513)

5 in. scale length
Carboloy (CA)
Tantalum (TA)
/8 in. Glass (BG)

Sapphire (SA)
316 Stainless Steel
Carboloy (CA)
Tantalum (TA)
/4 in. Glass (CD)

316 Stainless Steel
Sapphire (SA)
Carboloy (CA)
Tantalum (TA)
Dt/Df ratio scale, millimeters
/4 in. & 1/8 in. tube diameter
2.5
/16 in. tube diameter
Float Stop
PTFE
5 in. tube
3 1/2 in. tube 316 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
10
Fittings
Brass
316 S31 Stainless Steel
Delrin
10
O-rings
Buna N
Viton A
Ethylenepropylene
Kalrez
3 in. scale length

All sizes
11/2 in. scale length
All sizes
Permissible operating temperatures

Non-certified systems
Tube Adapter Brass

316 Stainless Steel
Stainless steel fittings
0 to 120 C process
Needle Valve
316 S31 Stainless Steel
Brass fittings
0 to 95 C process
Return Ball
PTFE
316 Stainless Steel
ATEX Certified systems
Other components
Max permissible Ambient or process

temperature in deg C whichever is the
greater
Option/Temp Class
T6
T5
T4
A6xxx without ring sensors
75
90
120
A6xxx with ring sensors
75
90
100
Types of installation
In-line, front- & rear-panel-mounting
Body
304 Stainless Steel
Operator
Protection
Shield
Polycarbonate
Connections
1
/4 in. NPT or G1/4 internal thread, rear-facing horizontal or vertical
Weights
Wall-mounting (regulator only)
Stainless steel
Fluid Temperature
Without Regulator
(kg)
With Regulator
(kg)
Model A6131/41
0.45
1.6
Model A6132/42
0.65
1.8
Model A6133/43
0.80
2.0
Model A6134/44
0.45
1.6
Model A6135/45
0.45
1.6

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Measuring Range Tables

Models A6131/41
Min. diff.
press.
bar a
Alarm
RC10 = 1
RC15 = 2
Measuring
Tube/Float
Combination c
2 to 21
0.17
01
2 to 30
0.18
02
3 to 50
0.18
03
50 to 1300
100 to 1500
5 to 80
5 to 95*
0.18
0.21
04
05
0.2 to 2.9
200 to 2000
10 to 125
0.21
06
0.4 to 5.4*
200 to 3000*
10 to 180
0.21
07
10 to 135
0.5 to 8.0
400 to 4000
20 to 260
0.21
08
TA-14
CD-14
15 to 145
10 to 130
1 to 8.5
0.5 to 7.5
460 to 4600
500 to 6500
27 to 270
20 to 380
0.21
0.35
10
01
SA-14
23
to 230
SS-14
20
to 400
CA-14
CD-14
40 to 580
20 to 220*
SA-14
SS-14
CA-14
CD-14
Measuring Tube
Float
Tube No.
Float No.
cm3/min
l/h
Qn (cm3/min)
Qn (l/h)
BG-18
0.4 to 4.4
0.02 to 0.26
20 to 360*
SA-18
0.5 to 8.5
0.04 to 0.5
20 to 500
SS-18
1 to 19*
0.1 to 1.1
50 to 850*
CA-18
BG-18
2 to 34
2 to 28
0.1 to 2.0
0.1 to 1.7
SA-18
4 to 48*
SS-18
5 to 90*
CA-18
FP- /8-08-P-3/37
FP-1/8-20-P-3/37
FP-1/4-15-P-3/37
FP-1/4-20-P-3/37
FP-1/4-41-G-3/37
Water
Air 0 C 1013 mbar

(cm3/min) (Qn)
850 to 8500
52 to 520
0.35
10
2 to 23.0
1000 to 12500
50 to 750
0.7
02
2 to 34.0
0.5 to 13.0*
1000 to 17000
500 to 9500
100 to 1050
40 to 560
0,7
0.35
03
04
40 to 400
2 to 22
1000 to 12500
70 to 750
0.35
11
40 to 580*
2.0 to 34.0*
1000 to 18000
100 to 1100
0.7
05
50 to 850
40 to 460
4 to 50.0
2 to 27.0
2000 to 25000
1000 to 19000
100 to 1500
100 to 1150
0.7
0.7
06
07
SA-14
70 to 750
4 to 46
3000 to 27000
200 to 1600
0.7
12
SS-14
100 to 1200
5 to 75.0*
2000 to 38000
100 to 2300
0.7
08
CA-14b
100 to 1800
4000 to 54000
200 to 3200
09
1.4 to 14
10 to 105
Notes.
a) Applies only with differential pressure regulator
b) Not available with differential pressure regulator
c) For ordering information only
* Direct reading scales as standard
Models A6131/41 with Inductive Alarm Sensor (RC10/RC15)

Measuring Tube
Float
Water cm3/min
Air 0 C 1013 mbar

(cm3/min) (Qn)
Minimum Differential
Pressure (bar)a
FP-1/8-08-P-3/37
SS-18
2 to 19
100 to 850
0.18
FP- /8-20-P-3/37
SS-18
10 to 90
400 to 3200
0.21
FP-1/4-15-P-3/37
SS-14
CA-14
40 to 400
80 to 580
1000 to 12500
2000 to 17000
0.7
1.5
FP-1/4-20-P-3/37
SS-14
CA-14
80 to 580
100 to 850
2000 to 18000
4000 to 25000
0.7
1.5
FP-1/4-41-G-3/37
SS-14
CA-14
150 to 1200
200 to 1800
6000 to 40000
8000 to 54000
0.7
Noteb
Ring Sensor
RC10-14-N3
1
RC15-14-N3
Notes.
a) In conjunction with differential pressure regulator

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Measuring Range Tables

Models A6132/42
Housing
Size
Measuring
Tube Size
/16 in.b
/8 in.
/4 in.
/4 in.
Max. flow a
H2O
cm3/min
Air 0 C 1013 mbar

(cm3/min) (Qn)
Float No.
Alarm
RC10 = 1
RC15 = 2
Float/
Measuring Tube
Combination c
0.53
0.92
1.61
2.45
48.1
80.0
131.1
192.5
FP-1/16-10-G-5/81
12
16
20
BG-16
01
02
03
04
1.05
1.58
3.2
4.82
73.2
117.0
188.6
270.1
FP-1/16-10-G-5/81
12
16
20
SA-16
05
06
07
08
2.46
4.2
7.2
10.3
136.0
203.5
319.2
430.5
FP-1/16-10-G-5/81
12
16
20
SS-16
09
10
11
12
4.71
7.6
12.3
17.8
217.9
307.1
475.3
636.2
FP-1/16-10-G-5/81
12
16
20
CA-16
13
14
15
16
5.25
8.4
13.5
18.6
234.2
326.7
508.5
678.0
FP-1/16-10-G-5/81
12
16
20
TA-16
17
18
19
20
6.1
13.9
22.6
31.5
43.7
373.6
696.3
1046.2
1426.6
1885.1
FP-1/8-08-G-5/81
12
16
20
25
BG-18
01
02
03
04
05
10.5
23.0
35.7
48.5
64.5
511.3
928.8
1384.7
1857.6
2454.0
FP-1/8-08-G-5/81
12
16
20
25
SA-18
06
07
08
09
10
20.5
39.5
60.0
81.0
107.0
804.4
1421.4
2092.8
2788.3
3629.1
FP-1/8-08-G-5/81
12
16
20
25
SS-18
1
1
1
1
1
11
12
13
14
15
33.6
61.2
90.6
121.7
159.7
1205.7
2089.4
3014.3
3997.8
5136.7
FP-1/8-08-G-5/81
12
16
20
25
CA-18
1
1
1
1
1
16
17
18
19
20
36.5
66.0
97.5
130.0
171.5
1287.9
2219.0
3202.4
4229.3
5456.3
FP-1/8-08-G-5/81
12
16
20
25
TA-18
21
22
23
24
25
78
152
206
275
3717
6742
8928
11479
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
CD-14
01
02
03
04
134
253
337
446
5200
9245
12231
15650
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
SA-14
05
06
07
08
228
415
547
703
7793
13672
17979
22900
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
SS-14
2
2
2
2
09
10
11
12
346
612
805
1036
10967
19227
25293
32200
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
CA-14
2
2
2
2
13
14
15
16
370
660
860
1105
11704
20457
26703
34276
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
TA-14
1500
2050
2200
45700
64800
67200
Notes.
a) Maximum flow rates for other fluids can be calculated using our
sizing software contact ABB
Measuring Tube
No.
FP-1/4-40-G-6/81
FP-1/4-40-G-6/81
FP-1/4-40-G-6/81
SS-14
CA-14
TA-14
17
18
19
20
2
2

c) For ordering information only
21
22
23

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5

Measuring
Tube
Float
Max. Flow
Minimum Differential
Pressure (bar) a
Ring Sensor
Water cm3/min
Air 0 C 1013 mbar

(cm3/min) (Qn)
FP-1/8-08-G-5/81
12
16
20
25
SS-18
20.5
39.5
60.0
81.0
107.0
804.4
1421.4
2092.8
2788.3
3629.1
0.18
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
SS-14
228
415
547
703
7793
13672
17979
22900
0.7
FP-1/4-10-G-5/81
16
20
25
CA-14
346
612
805
1036
10967
19227
25293
32200
1.5
FP- /4-40-G-6/281
40
SS-14
CA-14
1512
2180
RC10-14-N3
RC15-14-N3
48384
67580
0.7
Notes.
a) In conjunction with differential pressure regulator
Models A6133/43
Measuring Tube
Float
Max. Flow
Water
3
Air 0 C 1013 mbar

3
cm /min
l/h
cm /min (Qn)
l/h
FP- /8-077-G-10
SA-18
1 to 9.5
0.08 to 0.58
80 to 520
4 to 32
FP-1/8-13.3-G-10
BG-18
2 to 17
0.1 to 1.0
100 to 850
6 to 50
FP- /8-077-G-10
SS-18
2 to 20
0.15 to 1.2
100 to 800
6 to 50
FP-1/8-13.3-G-10
SA-18
2 to 27
0.2 to 1.6
150 to 1100
10 to 65
FP-1/8-13.3-G-10
SS-18
6 to 48
0.2 to 2.9
200 to 1700
10 to 100
FP-1/4-10-G-10
BG-14
10 to 95
0.8 to 5.6
400 to 4200
20 to 250
FP-1/4-19-G-10
BG-14
20 to 230
1.5 to 13.5
1000 to 9000
80 to 560
FP- /4-10-G-10
CA-14
40 to 360
2 to 22
1500 to 11500
100 to 700
FP-1/4-19-G-10
SS-14
80 to 540
4 to 32
2000 to 17000
150 to 1050
FP- /4-40-G-10
BG-14
80 to 600
4 to 38
2000 to 26000
200 to 1600
FP-1/4-19-G-10
CA-14
100 to 800*
6 to 48
2000 to 24000
150 to 1450
FP-1/4-40-G-10
SS-14
150 to 1500*
10 to 90
6000 to 48000
200 to 2900
FP-1/4-40-G-10
CA-14
200 to 2200*
15 to 135
1000 to 70000
400 to 4000
*Not available with differential pressure regulator

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5

Measuring Tube
Float
Max. Flow
Water
Air 0 C 1013 mbar
cm /min
l/h
cm /min (Qn)
l/h
FP-1/8-077-G-10
SS-18
2 to 20
0.15 to 1.2
100 to 800
6 to 50
FP-1/8-13.3-G-10
SS-18
6 to 48
0.2 to 2.9
200 to 1700
10 to 100
FP-1/4-10-G-10
CA-14
40 to 360
2 to 22
1500 to 11500
100 to 700
FP-1/4-19-G-10
SS-14
80 to 540
4 to 32
2000 to 17000
150 to 1050
FP-1/4-19-G-10
CA-14
100 to 800*
6 to 48
2000 to 24000
150 to 1450
FP-1/4-40-G-10
SS-14
150 to 1500*
10 to 90
6000 to 48000
200 to 2900
CA-14
200 to 2200*
15 to 135
1000 to 70000
400 to 4000
FP- /4-40-G-10
*Not available with differential pressure regulator
Models A6134/44
Measuring Tube b
Float No.
Water
cm3/min
Tube No.
FP 1/16 08 P 11/2/19
FP /16 30 P 1 /2/19
FP /8 21 P 1 /2/19
FP /32 40 P 1 /2/19
FP 1/4 28 P 11/2/19
FP /4 41 P 1 /2/19
Min. Required
Differential Press
bar a
Float/
Measuring Tube
Combination d
BG-16
0.05
to
0.8
to
65
01
SA 16
0.10
to
1.0
to
90
02
SS-16
0.50
to
4.0
15
to 170
03
BG 16
0.5
to
7.0
25
to 400
0.17
04
SA 16
1.0
to 13.0
50
to 550
0.17
05
SS 16
2.0
to 22.0
50
to 850
0.17
06
BG 18
2.5
to 37.5
100
to 2000
0.21
01
SA 18
5.0
to 60.0
200
to 2600
0.21
02
SS 18
10
to 120.0
200
to 3800
0.21
03
CA 18
14
to 180
280
to 5600
0.21
04
BG /32
15
to 190
700
to 8000
0.18
01
SS 5/32
40
to 450
1200
to 15000
0.18
02
SA 14
30
to 570
1300
to 19500
0.7
02
SS 14
50
to 850
2000
to 28000
0.7
01
SS 14
100
to 1600
2500
to 45000
03
CA 14
200
to 2200
5000
to 70000
04
Notes.
a) Applies only with built-in differential pressure regulator
b) Only with % scale. Not available with differential pressure regulator.
c) Not available with differential pressure regulator.
d) For ordering information only.
Air 0 C 1013 mbar

(cm3/min) (Qn)

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Overall Dimensions
In-line and Front Panel-mounting (horizontal and vertical connections)
Dimensions in mm (in.)
39 (1.54)
[45 (1.77 ) for ATEX designs]
20.5 (0.81)
36 (1.42)
39 (1.54)
3 (0.12)
16 (0.63)
D
6.3 (0.25)
28.5 (1.12)
75 (2.95) max.
22 (0.86)
Front
(typical all models)
Valve at Inlet
Vertical Connection
Horizontal Connection
20.5 (0.81) dia.
75 (2.95) max.
19 (0.75)
28.5
5 (0.2) dia.*
Panel drilling for horizontal

3 (0.12)
Note.
Instruments with alarm sensors mounted
side-by-side should be separated by the
following dimensions:
RC10-14-N3 = 32 mm
RC15-14-N3 = 42 mm
3 (0.12)
20.5 (0.81)
20.5 (0.81)
39
(1.54)
39
(1.54)
Valve at Outlet
* These holes are necessary only when

mounting using adapter plates
No Valve
Dimensions
D
Scale Length
Model No.
/4 in. NPT
36.5
165
181
238
264
4/5 in.
A6x32/42
/4 in. NPT
27.2
71
68
125
151
3 in.
A6x31/41
/4 in. NPT
27.2
40
37
94
120
11/2 in.
A6x34/44
/4 in. NPT
27.2
71
68
125
151
3 in.
A6x35/45
G /4
G /4
G 1/4
G 1/4

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Purgemaster with Regulator

625 (2.440.2)
39 (1.53)
20.5 (0.81)
E5 (0.2)
39 (1.53)
60 (2.36)
13 (0.51)
19 (0.75)
5.6 (0.22)
6.5
(0.26)
44 (1.73)
57 (2.24)
22
(0.87)
36
(1.42)
6.5 8.5
(0.26) (0.33)
75 (2.95) max.
35
(1.38)
Wall-mounting
150 5 (5.9 0.2) max.
39 (1.53)
C5 (0.2)
20.5 (0.81)
39 (1.53)
19 (0.75)
13 (0.51)
75 (2.95) max.
D
44 (1.73)
43
(1.7)
Pipe-mounting
Dimensions
D
Scale
length
Model-No.
G 1/4
338
80
238
264
5 in.
A6122-53R_2110
G 1/4
225
108
125
151
3 in.
A6121-53R_2110
G 1/4
194
108
94
120
11/2 in.
A6124-53R_2110
/4 in. NPT
/4 in. NPT
/4 in. NPT

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Overall Dimensions
Panel-mounting (horizontal connections)
All process connections
G 1/4 or 1/4 in. NPT
80 (3.156)
37 (1.437) 42 (1.656)
(Valve
open)
1.6 (0.062)
Outlet
79 (3.125)
42
(1.656)
42
37
(1.437) (1.656)
No Valve
Valve at Inlet
0.4 (0.016)
Front
Typical all models
42
(1.656)
Panel
Valve at Outlet
Notes.
1) All dimensions are subject to a
manufacturing tolerance of 3 mm (0.125),
unless otherwise specified.
Dimensions
Nom. Scale
Length
Inlet
Inlet
Inlet
See
Note 2
Outlet
Outlet
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
11/2
38
431/32
126
323/32
94
53/32
129
2) Dotted line indicates rear of panel clearance

requirements.
76
63/16
157
415/16
125
65/16
160
3) Panel hardware for 8 (0.312) max. panel thickness.
127
105/8
270
93/8
238
103/4
273
10
254
151/16
383
1313/16
351
153/16
386

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Panel-mounting with Differential Pressure Regulator

80 (3.156)
Optional valve
inlet or outlet
(Shown on inlet)
Outlet
connection
1/4 in. NPT
or
G1 / 4
1.6 (0.063)
37 (1.437)
19 (0.75)
1036 (3.0.780,25)
Inlet connection
in. NPT
or
G1 / 4
37
(1.437)
1 /4
(Valve Open)
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
11/2
38
57/8
149
57/8 1/4
149 6
53/32
129 431/32 126
76
57/8
149
57/8 1/4
149 6
65/16
160
5
10
10
127
10 /4
254
11
14 /16
260 4 /32 /4 118 6 10 /4

21
mm
273
in.
63/16
5
10 / 8
mm
157
270
373 4 /32 /4 118 6 15 /16 386 15 /16 383

21
79 (3.125)
See Note 2
Notes.
1) All dimensions are subject to a
manufacturing tolerance of 3 mm (0.125 in.),
unless otherwise specified.
Dimensions
Scale
Length
0.4
(0.015)
2) Dotted line indicates rear of panel

clearance requirements.
3) Panel hardware for 8 (0.312) max. panel
thickness

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Overall Dimensions
Panel Cut-out for Panel-mounting
Scale Length 38 (1.5)

118.2 (4.656)
Holes 5 (0.196) o.d.
33.7
1.328)
33.7
1.328)
25.4
(1.0)
55.6 (2.187)
38 (1.5)
Scale Length 76 (3)

149 (5.875)
Holes 5. (0.196) o.d
49.2
(1.937)
49.2
(1.937)
25.4
(1.0)
55.6 (2.187)
38 (1.5)
Scale Length 127 (5)

262 (10 312)
Holes 5 (0.196) o.d.
38 (1.5)
52.8
(2.078)
52.8
(2.078)
52.8
(2.078)
52.8
(2.078)
25.4
(1.0)
55.6 (2.187)
11

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Model Code
Connection
Horizontal
Vertical
Connection Type
As regulator
1
/4 in. NTP
G1/4
Tube 6 mm
Tube 8 mm
Hoses 6 mm
Hoses 8 mm
Special
Tube Length
3 in.
5 in.
10 in.
11/2 in.
Tube Diameter
1
/16 in.
1
/8 in.
1
/4 in.
5
/32 in.
Tube / Float
None
Select from Tables on pages 3, 4 or 5
Scale Type
Without
Direct reading
dt/df ratio
Percent
Standard direct reading
Calibrated
Materials
Brass / Viton
Brass / Buna
Brass / Ethylenepropylene
Brass / Kalrez
Stainless steel / Viton
Valve
Without Valve
Valve at Outlet, Low Capacity (Size 1.2)
Valve at Outlet, Medium Capacity (Size 2.2)
Valve at Outlet, High Capacity (Size 3.2)
Valve at Inlet, Low Capacity (Size 1.2)
Valve at Inlet, Medium Capacity (Size 2.2)
Valve at Inlet, High Capacity (Size 3.2)
Alarm (excluding amplifier)
Without
Min. alarm
Max. alarm
Min. & max. alarm
Suitable for alarms (no sensors fitted)
Regulator
Without
Standard capacity 1/4 in. NTP
Standard capacity G 1/4
High capacity 1/4 in. NTP
High capacity G 1/4
Mounting
In-line
Wall
Rear panel
Front panel
Laboratory stand
Front panel + adaptor
Front panel + end cap
Front panel + end cap + adaptor
Design level
Certification
ATEX II 2Gc T6 T4 with Ring Sensor
ATEX II 2GDc T4 130 C without Ring Sensor
None
12
A6 X
O
*
O
*
X X X X
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
0
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
C
D
I
Stainless steel / Buna

Stainless steel / Ethylenepropylene
Stainless steel / Kalrez
Special
A
C
M
E
D
N
F
DVGW Valve at Outlet, Low Capacity (Size 1.2)

DVGW Valve at Outlet, Medium Capacity (Size 2.2)
DVGW Valve at Outlet, High Capacity (Size 3.2)
DVGW Valve at Inlet, Low Capacity (Size 1.2)
DVGW Valve at Inlet, Medium Capacity (Size 2.2)
DVGW Valve at Inlet, High Capacity (Size 3.2)
J
K
L
Z
S
Q
U
T
R
V
A
B
C
D
E
0
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
A
D
S

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Alarm Unit for Purgemaster
Specification Ring Sensor
The alarm comprises a ring sensor and associated switching

amplifier, available as an accessory, for glass-tube type variablearea flowmeters, type A6x31/41 and A6x32/42.
Part Nos.
Clamped directly to the body, the ring sensor is continuously

adjustable across the overall metering range. The ring sensor
can be used with all metal-float equipped flowmeters according
to the capacity tables.
Principle of Operation
The ring sensor, with a bistable switching action, energizes the
relay in the amplifier when the float reaches the trigger level. It
remains in that position, even if the float continues to move
towards the alarm zone, thus leaving the trigger level. The relay
de-energizes as soon as the float crosses the trigger level from
the opposite direction and moves back from the alarm zone into
the normal operating range. The actual float position above or
below the trigger level is indicated precisely.
Operation in a hazardous area is possible, since the ring sensor
used is an intrinsically safe switch with an intrinsically safe circuit.
Flowmeter Model A6x31/41 is suitable for use either as a
minimum alarm or a maximum alarm, due to its short metering
tube. Model A6x32/42 is recommended if both alarm operations
are required.
Measuring tube 1/4 in. type RC10-14-N3

Measuring tube 1/8 in. type RC15-14-N3
Supply voltage
10 V DC
Operating range
In direction 1
2.9 mA
In direction 2
4.8 mA
Permissible resistance of control cable

100
Repeatability
1 % (T = constant)
Temperature drift
10 %
Permissible ambient temperature
0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Connection cable
LIFYY x 0.14 mm2
Cable length
5 m (16.5 ft)
Design Features
Sensor height 14 mm, minimizes coverage of the scale
Integrated clamp secures device directly to the meter
body
No automatic adjustment during operation is possible
Housing
Black Polycarbonate
Protection type as per EN 60529
IP67
Certificate of conformity
Ring Sensor only:
PTB 99 ATEX 2128X

II 2G EEx ia IIC T6
Flowmeter with Ring Sensor:
BASEEFA 03 ATEX 0424X

II 2G EEx c T6 T4
Flowmeter with Ring Sensor:
BASEEFA 03 ATEX 0424X

II 2GD EEx c 130C
Weight
40 g (1.4 oz.) approx.
13

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Alarm Unit for Purgemasters

Specification Switching Amplifier
Switch amplifier
Amplifier
Supply Voltage
Channels
KFD2-SR2-Ex1.W
KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W
24 V DC
24 V DC
1
2
KFA5-SR2-Ex1.W
KFA5-SR2-Ex2.W
115 V AC
115 V AC
1
2
KFA6-SR2-Ex1.W
KFA6-SR2-Ex2.W
230 V AC
230 V AC
1
2
Certificate number
PTB 00 ATEX 2080
Protection class
IP20
Electrical connection
Terminals
Weight
Output
0.15 kg (0.33 lb) approx.
Relay with potential-free changeover contacts.

Switching capacity max. 2 A at 250 V AC
Power consumption
Max. 1 W
Permissible ambient temperature
20 to +60 C (4 to 140 F)
Ex protection
Circuits in Zone 0/1/2 EEx II (I) G D [EEx ai] IIC
U0 = 10.5 V
IO = 13 mA
PO = 34 mW
Electrical Connections
Safe Area or Div 2
Input 1
8
7
Relay
Output 1
to follow
4
11
10
Input 2
Relay
Output 2
12
6
14 +
Supply
15
Input 2 and Relay 2 Connections Only Where Fitted

(Only for Amplifiers KFD2-SR2-EX2W, KFA5-SR2-EX2W and KFA6-SR2-EX2W)
Electrical Connections
14

SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
Overall Dimensions
20 (0.8)
6 (0.2)
32.5 (1.3)
20 (0.8)
3.1 (0.1)
14 (0.6)
12.5 (0.5)
16 (0.6)
25 (1.0)
Ring Sensor
20 (0.8)
118 (4.6)
115 (4.5)
Switch Amplifier
15

ABB has Sales & Customer Support

expertise in over 100 countries worldwide
SS/A61/A62 Issue 5
The Companys policy is one of continuous product

improvement and the right is reserved to modify the
information contained herein without notice.
Printed in UK (12.08)
www.abb.com
SS/A61/A62
Issue 5
ABB 2008
ABB Limited
Salterbeck Trading Estate
Workington, Cumbria
CA14 5DS
UK
Tel: +44 (0)1946 830 611
Fax: +44 (0)1946 832 661
ABB Inc.
125E County Line Road
Warminster
PA 18974
USA
Tel: +1 215 674 6000
Fax: +1 215 674 7183
14
Brooks
Flow meter
MT-1355
21
Danfoss
Temperature regulator
AVTA10
Data sheet
Thermostatically operated
cooling water valves
Type AVTA
September 2000
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
520B0664
Thermostatically operated cooling water valves

Type AVTA
Page
Contents
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 3
Technical data .............................................................................................................................. 3
AVTA for neutral media ................................................................................................................ 4
Ordering ....................................................................................................................................... 5
Dimensions and weights ............................................................................................................. 6
AVTA DZR for slightly aggressive media ..................................................................................... 7
Ordering ....................................................................................................................................... 8
Dimensions .................................................................................................................................. 9
AVTA SS for aggressive media ................................................................................................. 10
Ordering ..................................................................................................................................... 11
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................ 11
Installation .................................................................................................................................. 12
Sensor installation ..................................................................................................................... 12
Spare parts and accessories ..................................................................................................... 13
Sizing ......................................................................................................................................... 14
Diagrams ................................................................................................................................... 15
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Introduction
Thermostatically operated valves are used for

the infinite, proportional regulation of flow
quantity, depending on the setting and the
sensor temperature.
The Danfoss range of thermostatic valves
includes a series of industrial products for
both refrigeration and heating regulation. The
valves are self-acting, i.e. they operate
without the supply of auxiliary energy such as
electricity or compressed air.
Technical data
Because the valves constantly match flow

quantity to demand, they are especially
suitable for temperature regulation.
The required temperature is maintained
constant with no overconsumption of:
- cooling water in cooling systems,
- hot water or steam in heating systems.
Thus operating economy is always
reasonable.
For further information on thermostatically
operated valves for heating regulation
(AVTB), please contact Danfoss.
General
Thermostatic valves consist of three main elements:
Setting section with knob, reference spring and

setting scale
Valve body with orifice, closing cone and sealing

elements.
Hermetically sealed thermostatic element with

sensor, bellows and charge.
Function
When the three elements are built together,
the valve is installed and the sensor is
located at the point where the temperature is
to be regulated, the function sequence is as
follows:
4. When balance is created between the two

opposing forces, the valve spindle remains
in its position.
1. A temperature-dependent pressure charge vapour pressure - builds up in the

sensor.
2. This pressure is transferred to the valve via
the capillary tube and bellows and acts as
an opening or closing force.
3. The knob on the setting section and the
spring exert a force that acts counter to the
bellows.
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
5. If the sensor temperature - or the setting is changed, the point of balance becomes
displaced and the valve spindle moves until
balance is re-established, or the valve is
fully open or closed.
6. On sensor temperature change, the flow
quantity change is approximately
proportional.
The illustrations show an AVTA cooling water
valve, but the function principle applies to all
types of thermostatic valves.
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
AVTA
for neutral media
Application
Self-acting AVTA cooling water valves are

widely used for temperature regulation in
many different machines and installations
where cooling is a requirement. AVTA always
opens to admit flow on rising sensor temperature. The valve can be installed either in the
cooling water flow line or return line.
Typical applications:
Injection moulding machines
Compressors
Vacuum pumps
Dry cleaning machines
Distillation plant
Printing machines
Hydraulic systems
Rollers/mills
AVTA with NPT connection, please contact
Danfoss for North American data sheet.
Specifications and
product overview
Opens on rising sensor temperature

Media temperature 25 + 130C
Differential pressure 0 10 bar
Max. working pressure 16 bar
Max. test pressure 25 bar
Max. pressure on sensor 25 bar
The valves are pressure-relieved, i.e. the
degree of opening is not affected by differential pressure Dp (pressure drop).
The regulation range is defined for the point
at which the valve begins to open.
AVTA valves are available with three different

types of charge (see pages 4 and 5):
A: Adsorption charge
B: Mass charge
C: Universal charge
Materials - parts in contact with the medium, AVTA

No.
1
Description
Spindle
Material
Brass
2
3
Diaphragms
Valve body and other metal parts
Rubber - ethylene - propylene (EPDM)

Forged brass
W.no. 2.0402
4
5
Valve cone
Valve seat
Nitrile rubber (NBR)

Stainless steel
Sensor
Capillary tube gland
Copper
Brass
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000
W.no. 2.0401
W.no. 1.4305 / AISI 303

W.no. 2.0090
W.no. 2.0321 / 2.0401

Type AVTA
Ordering
AVTA with adsorption
charge
The charge consists of active carbon and

CO2 which is adsorbed on falling sensor
temperature and thereby produce pressure
changes in the element.
Connection
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 3/4
G1
1)
Regulating
range
Special characteristics
Wide regulating range
Can be installed in any position as far as
orientation and - temperature are concerned
Withstands up to +130C sensor temperature
Small sensor dimensions - 9,5 160 mm
Capillary tube
length
[m]
kv value
(m3/h at Dp = 1 bar)
+10 +80C
1.4
1.9
2.3
3.4
5.5
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 10
AVTA 15
003N1144
003N0107
AVTA 20
AVTA 25
003N0108
003N0109
Code no. covers complete valve incl. capillary tube gland.
Immersion sensors, see Spare parts and accessories, page 13.
Ordering
AVTA with universal
charge
Sensor dimensions 18 210 mm
Sensor can be installed colder or warmer
than the valve
Sensors must be orientated as shown in
the sketch on page 12
Regulation range 0 +30C, max. sensor temperature +57C
The charge is liquid/gas where the liquid
surface (regulating point) is always inside the
sensor. Which charge medium is used depends on the temperature range.
G 3/8
kv value
1.4
G 1/2
G 3/4
1.9
3.4
G1
5.5
Connection
Capillary tube length
2m
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 10
003N1132
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
003N2132
003N3132
AVTA 25
003N4132
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 10
003N1162
003N2162
) Code no. covers complete valve incl. capillary tube gland.
Regulation range 25 +65C, max. sensor temperature +90C

Connection
kv value
G 3/8
1.4
G 1/2
1.9
G 3/4
3.4

2m
2 m (armoured)
2m
5m
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
2 m (armoured)
2m
G1
5.5
2 m (armoured)
5m
1
003N0041
003N3162
003N3165
003N0031
003N4162
AVTA 25
003N0032
003N4165

[m]
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 10
003N1182
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
003N2182
003N3182
AVTA 25
003N4182
003N41832)
Regulation range +50 +90C, max. sensor temperature +125C
G 3/8
kv value
1.4
G 1/2
G 3/4
1.9
3.4
G1
5.5
Connection
Valve body with bypass
1)
2)

A 2 mm bypass is drilled in the valve body.
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Ordering
AVTA with mass charge
The charge is liquid/gas. Because of the

volumetric conditions the liquid surface
(regulation point) can be either in the sensor
or the bellows, depending on the temperature
conditions.
Small sensor dimensions ( 9.5 190 mm)
Short time constant
Sensor must always be installed warmer
than the valve
Regulation range 0 +30C
Max. sensor temperature +57C
Connection
kv value

[m]
Type
Code no. 1)
1.9
3.4
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
003N0042
003N0043
G 1/2
G 3/4
1)
Regulation range +25 +65C

kv value

[m]
Type
Code no. 1)
G 1/2
1.9
2
2 (armoured)
AVTA 15
003N0045
003N0299
G 3/4
G1
3.4
5.5
AVTA 20
AVTA 25
003N0034
003N0046
003N0047
Connection
1)
Dimensions and weights
Type
H1
H2
L1
Weight
AVTA 10
[mm]
240
[mm]
133
[mm]
72
[mm]
14
G 3/8
[mm]
27
[kg]
1.45
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
240
240
133
133
72
90
14
16
G 1/2
G 3/4
27
32
1.45
1.50
AVTA 25
240
138
95
19
G1
41
1.65
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
AVTA DZR
for slightly aggressive media
Application
A valve body in dezincification-resistant brass

means that the valve can be used for neutral
and slightly aggressive media.
External thread gives easy valve installation
and removal.
Pressure stage PN 16; max. +130C.
AVTA DZR valves are available with two
different types of charge: Adsorption charge
and universal charge.
AVTA DZR can also be supplied with mass
charge (please contact Danfoss).
Specifications and
product overview

Media temperature -25 +130C
Max. pressure on the sensor 25 bar
The valves are pressure-relieved, i.e. the
degree of opening is not affected by
differential pressure Dp (pressure drop).
Materials - parts in contact with the medium

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Spindle
Material
Dezincification-resistant brass
Diaphragm
Valve body

Dezincification-resistant brass
CuZn36Pb2As / BS2874 / CZ132
Valve cone
Valve seat

Stainless steel
Sensor
Copper
Brass
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
CuZn36Pb2As / BS2874 / CZ132
W.no. 1.4305 / AISI 303

W.no. 2.0090
W.no. 2.0321 / 2.0401
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Ordering
AVTA DZR with adsorption
charge

Connection
[C]
G 3/4 A
G1A
1)
Regulation
range
Withstands up to +130C sensor
temperature
orientation and temperature are concerned
Small sensor dimensions - 9,5 160 mm
kv value
(m3/h at
Dp = 1 bar)
Capillary
tube length
[m]
1.9
3.4
2.3
+10 +80C
G 11/4 A
5.5
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
003N2134
003N3134
AVTA 25
003N4134
Ordering
AVTA DZR with universal
charge
AVTA with universal charge

The charge is liquid/gas where the liquid
surface (regulation point) is always inside the
sensor. The charge medium used depends
on the temperature range.
Sensor dimensions 18 210 mm
Sensor can be installed colder or warmer
than the valve
Sensors must be orientated as shown in
the sketch on page 12
Regulation range 0 +30C

[m]
G 3/4 A
kv value
1.9
G1A
G 11/4 A
3.4
5.5
Connection
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 15
003N2135
AVTA 20
AVTA 25
003N3135
003N4135
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
003N2136
003N3136
AVTA 25
003N4136

G 3/4 A
G1A
kv value
1.9
3.4
G 11/4 A
5.5
Connection

[m]
2

kv value

[m]
Type
Code no. 1)
G 3/4 A
G1A
1.9
3.4
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
003N2137
003N3137
G 11/4 A
5.5
AVTA 25
003N4137
Connection
1)
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Dimensions
AVTA DZR
Type
H1
H2
AVTA 15
[mm]
217
AVTA 20
AVTA 25
217
227
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
L2
w. threaded conn.
[mm]
141
L3
w. weld conn.
[mm]
149
b
ISO 228/1
[mm]
133
L1
(standard)
[mm]
75
133
138
80
83
152
167
164
167
G1A
G 11/4 A
Danfoss A/S 09-2000
G 3/4 A

Type AVTA
AVTA SS
for aggressive media
Application
A valve body in stainless steel means that the

valve can be used for aggressive media in
such applications as the marine sector and
the chemical industry.
Pressure stage PN 16; max. +130C.
For extremely aggressive media the valve
can be supplied in titanium (please contact
Danfoss).
AVTA SS valves have an adsorption charge
as standard.
AVTA SS can also be supplied with mass
charge or universal charge (please contact
Danfoss).
Specifications and
product overview

Media temperature -25 +130C
Valves are pressure-relieved, i.e. the
degree of opening is not affected by
differential pressure Dp (pressure drop).
Materials - parts in contact with the medium

No.
Description
Material
Spindle
Diaphragms
Stainless steel W.no. 1.4539 (EN10088); UNS N 08904

Valve body
Valve cone
Stainless steel W.no. 1.4581 (EN10214-4); AISI 318

Sensor
Copper (DIN 1787) W.no. 2.0090

Nitrile rubber (NBR), brass (DIN 17660) W.no. 2.0321 and W.no. 2.0401
2
3
4
5
6
10
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Ordering
AVTA with adsorption
charge

Connection
Regulationrange
G
G 3/4
G1
1
orientation and temperature are concerned
Withstands up to +130C sensor
temperature
Small sensor dimensions - 9.5 160 mm
kv value
(m3/h at
Dp = 1 bar)
Capillartube length
[m]
1.9
+10 +80C
3.4
5.5
2.3
Type
Code no. 1)
AVTA 15
003N2150
AVTA 20
AVTA 25
003N3150
003N4150
Immersion sensors, see Spare parts and accessories, page 13
Dimensions
AVTA SS
Type
H1
[mm]
H2
[mm]
L
[mm]
a
ISO 228/1
AVTA 15
AVTA 20
240
240
133
133
72
90
G
G 3/4
AVTA 25
250
138
95
G1
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000
11

Type AVTA
Installation
The valves can be installed in any position.

An arrow on the valve body indicates the
direction of flow.
AVTA valves are also marked so that the
letters RA can be read straightforwardly when
the valve is held as shown.
The installation of an FV filter ahead of the
valve is recommended - see separate data
sheet DKACV.PD.600.B.
Capillary tube
Install the capillary tube without sharp bends
(no kinks). Relieve the capillary tube at the
ends. Relief is important where vibration
might occur.
Note
Where AVTA is used, the sensor must be able
to react to variations in cooling water
temperature on system start.
Therefore a bypass line with a shut-off valve
might be necessary to ensure flow at the
sensor during start-up.
AVTA with mounting bracket
Sensor installation
If an immersion sensor is installed, the use of

heat-conductive compound is recommended.
This will reduce reaction time. See Spare
parts and accessories, page 13.
If a mounting bracket is used - see Spare

parts and accessories, page 13 - it must
always be between valve body and setting
section (see illustration).
AVTA with small sensor ( 9.5 190 mm)

must always be installed in the flow line,
where the regulated liquid is coldest (sensor
warmer).
Adsorption charge
Mass charge
Universal charge
Sensor 9,5 160 mm

(Sensor warmer or colder)
Sensor 9.5 190 mm

(Sensor warmer)
Sensor 18 210 mm
(Sensor warmer or colder)
Up = upwards
12
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Spare parts and

accessories
Service elements for AVTA
Adsorption charge - sensor
Universal charge - sensor
9.5 160 mm
18 210 mm
Temperatur
range
[C]
+10
+80
0 +30
+25
+65
+90
0 +30
+25 +65
+50
Mass charge - sensor
9.5 190 mm
Capillary
tube length
[m]
2.3
2
003N0278
003N0075
5
2
003N0077
003N0078
5
2 (armoured)
003N0080
003N0063
3
2
003N0079
003N0062
3
2
2
003N0089
003N0066
003N0091
003N0068
Code no.
Accessories
Designation
Immersion sensor
max. pressure 25 bar
L = 182 mm
Mounting bracket
For AVTA
003N0388
Heat-conductive compound
5 gram tube
0.8 kg
041E0110
041E0111
For AVTA 10/15

For AVTA 20
For AVTA 25
003N0445
003N0446
003N0447
G 1/2
G 3/4
3
/4 -14 NPT
017-4220
003N0155
003N0056
2 o-rings
2 diaphragms
Valve cone
For AVTA 10/15

For AVTA 20
For AVTA 25
L = 220 mm
1 nitrile diaphragm
for mineral oil
Accessories for
AVTA, DZR version
Code no.
18 sensor G /
18 mm
sensor / - 14 NPT
18/8 steel for 18 sensor G /
Brass for 9.5 sensor G /
18/8 steel for 9.5 sensor G /
Immersion sensor
max. pressure 25 bar
1)
Description
Brass for
Brass for
3
003N0050
003N0051
1)
1)
003N0192
017-4367
003N0196
003N400600
003N400700
003N400800
W1.4301
Threaded connectors
Contents of set
2 Unions,
2 nipples and
2 seals
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Weld connectors
DN
15
20
Code no.
003N5070
003N5071
25
003N5072
Contents of set
2 Unions,
2 nipples and
2 seals
Danfoss A/S 09-2000
DN
15
20
Code no.
003N5090
003N5091
25
003N5092
13

Type AVTA
Sizing
When sizing and selecting thermostatic

valves, it is most important to ensure that the
valve is able to give the necessary quantity of
cooling water at any time, irrespective of the
load. Therefore, to select a suitable size of
valve it is necessary to know the precise
amount of cooling required. On the other
hand, to avoid the risk of unstable regulation
(hunting), the valve should not be oversized.
The type of charge must be selected on the
basis of the temperature to be maintained,
and on an assessment of the characteristics
of each type, as described in the foregoing.
Valve size
The following data are used when selecting
valve size:
- Required cooling water flow, Q [m3/h]
- Temperature rise in cooling water, [Dt] (C)
- Differential pressure across valve, [Dp]
(bar).
With fully open valve the differential
pressure should be around 50% of the total
pressure drop across the cooling system.
In general the aim should be to select the

smallest valve capable of giving the required
flow.
Fig. 1 - Relation between heat quantity [kW]

and cooling water quantity
Fig. 2 - Graphs of kv values
Fig. 3 - Valve operating range
Fig. 4 - Flow quantities as a function of
pressure drop [Dp]
It is also recommended that the temperature

range be chosen so that the required sensor
temperature lies in the middle of the
regulation range.
The diagrams on page 15 are intended to

make valve sizing easier.
To help fine-setting the valve, a thermometer

should be installed near the sensor.
Example
A cooling water valve must be selected for
the temperature regulation of a vacuum
pump.
Since direct regulation of the oil temperature
is required, an AVTA valve is suitable. The
sensor position is horizontal - and small
dimensions are desired.
Given data:
- Necessary cooling at full load 10 kW.
- Oil temperature to be maintained constant
at +45C
- Cooling water p1 = 3 bar
- Outlet p3 = 0 bar
- Cooling water temperature t1 = +20C
- Outlet temperature t2 = +30C
1. The graphs in fig. 1 can be used to find the
necessary cooling water quantity at
Dt = 10 C (+30C - +20C) to 0.85 m/h.
2. The graphs in fig. 2 show the necessary kv
value for 0.85 m/h with
Dp = 1.5 bar
3 0
for 0.7 m3/h.
3. The columns in fig. 3 show that all four

ATVA valves can be used, but in practice
an ATVA 10 or 15 should be selected.
The above considerations apply to both AVTA
and FJVA valve types.
14
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Fig. 4
Operating conditions and other product

requirements in this example mean that a
valve with adsorption charge is the correct
choice.
The temperature range +10 +80C is in
order.
The table at the top of page 4 shows AVTA
10, code no. 003N1144, or AVTA 15, code no.
003N0107. Both fulfil the requirements
named.
In many applications, installation conditions
make the use of sensor pockets advisable.
Accessories on page 13 gives the code nos.
for sensor pockets for 9.5 mm sensors in
brass and stainless steel: 993N3569 and
003N0196, respectively.
Danfoss A/S 09-2000

Type AVTA
Sizing
Fig. 1
Heating or cooling with water.
Example: Necessary cooling output 10 kW, with
Dt = 10 C.
Required flow 0.85 m/h.
Fig. 2
Relation between water quantity and pressure drop across valve.
Example: Flow 0.85 m/h with a pressure drop of 1.5 bar.
The kv value becomes 0.7 m/h.
Pressure drop across valve
bar
Fig. 3
Nomogram showing the
valve kv ranges. kv values
are always given for the
water flow in m/h with a
pressure drop Dp of 1 bar.
The valve should be
selected so that the
necessary kv value lies in
the middle of the regulation
range.
Example: AVTA 10 and 15
are the most suitable for a
kv value of 0.7.
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Capacity with fully open valve
m3/h
Fig. 4
Valve flow quantity in fully open position, as a
function of pressure drop Dp.
Danfoss A/S 09-2000
15

Type AVTA
16
DKACV.PD.500.A2.02
Danfoss A/S 09-2000
AC-TMP/con
22
Kytl
Flow indicator
A-5A-A
FLOW METER
Model A, C, D
Variable area flow meter models
A, C, and D are clear, easy to read
acrylic flow meters. They are reliable
instruments for measuring and
monitoring liquid and gas flows.
FEATURES
Machined acrylic body
Clear, easy to read scale
Model A
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Water treatment
Sealing water measurements
Gas flow measurements
OPTIONS
Model C
Model D
Scale for alternative liquids and gases

Special scale markings
Thread adapters
Technical data A
Connections
BSP 3/8", Thread adapters

must be used for NPT-connections
190 g
Acrylic (PMMA)
20 bar (30 bar/30 C)
75 C
5 % F.S (H2O, 20 C)
Weight
Body
Max. pressure
Max. temperature
Accuracy
BSP 3/8
A-
Scale
A
H2O (l/min) at +20C
Air (Nl/min) at +20C / 101,3 kPa

Flow range
Air
2K
2 - 20 ml/min
0,1 - 0,9 Nl/min
2A
4 - 34 ml/min
0,1 - 1,3 Nl/min
2B
5 - 60 ml/min
0,2 - 2 Nl/min
2C
10 - 95 ml/min
0,4 - 2,8 Nl/min
3K
0,01- 0,13 l/min
0,5 - 6,5 Nl/min
3A
0,02 - 0,22 l/min
0,5 - 8 Nl/min
3B
0,02 - 0,36 l/min
1 -11 Nl/min
3C
0,05 - 0,5 l/min
1 - 14 Nl/min
BSP 3/8
8M
0,1 - 1,1 l/min
4 - 30 Nl/min
37x37
8P
0,2 - 1,8 l/min
5 - 50 Nl/min
8S
0,2 - 2,6 l/min
5 - 75 Nl/min
8R
0,25 - 3 l/min
10 - 90 Nl/min
5A
0,5 - 5 l/min
10 - 150 Nl/min
8D
0,5 - 6,5 l/min
20 - 220 Nl/min
130
H2O
KYTOLA OY Olli Kytolan tie 1

P.O. Box 5 FI-40951 MUURAME FINLAND
Phone +358 14 339 0600 Fax +358 14 631 419
E-mail sales@kytola.com www.kytola.com
LOCAL
REPRESENTATIVE
MANUFACTURER
Note, thread adapters must be used

for NPT-connections
Technical data C
Connections
BSP 3/4", Thread adapters

510 g
Acrylic (PMMA)
20 bar (30 bar/30 C)
75 C
5 % F.S (H2O, 20 C)
Weight
Body
Max. pressure
Max. temperature
Accuracy
BSP 3/4
C-
Scale
H2O (l/min) at +20C

165
Flow range
H2O
Air
4A
0,5 - 5 l/min
20 - 200 Nl/min
4B
1,5 - 8,5 l/min
25 - 250 Nl/min
4C
1 - 10 l/min
25 - 300 Nl/min
4D
2 - 16 l/min
75 - 450 Nl/min
4E
2 - 20 l/min
50 - 600 Nl/min
4F
5 - 30 l/min
100 - 1000 Nl/min
BSP 3/4
54x54

Phone +358 14 339 0600 Fax +358 14 631 419
LOCAL
REPRESENTATIVE
MANUFACTURER

for NPT-connections
Technical data D
Connections
BSP 1", Thread adapters

620 g
Acrylic (PMMA)
20 bar (30 bar/30 C)
75 C
5 % F.S (H2O, 20 C)
Weight
Body
Max. pressure
Max. temperature
Accuracy
BSP 1
D-
Scale
H2O (l/min) at +20C

210
Flow range
H2O
Air
4A
7,5 - 40 l/min
200 - 1200 Nl/min
4B
7,5 - 50 l/min
200 - 1400 Nl/min
4C
10 - 60 l/min
300 - 1500 Nl/min
4D
10 - 80 l/min
300 - 2100 Nl/min
4E
10 - 100 l/min
500 - 2500 Nl/min
54x54

Phone +358 14 339 0600 Fax +358 14 631 419
LOCAL
REPRESENTATIVE
MANUFACTURER

for NPT-connections
23
Oliver
Ball valve
B6FX50S/PMHB
Product Data Sheet
B6F Type Ball Valve

The B6 Type Single Isolating Ball Valve is designed for
safe and reliable isolation giving bubble tight shut off.
Totally enclosed soft seats offer both positive sealing
and low operating torques, from vacuum to highpressure service. Anti-blow out spindle is fitted as
standard with the option of PTFE or Grafoil seals.
Part No.
Connections
B6FX25
B6FX38
B6FX50
B6FY75
B6FZ10
1/4"
3/8
1/2"
3/4"
1
Size
Weight
2.4
2.4
3.4
4.1
4.8
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
0.4
0.4
0.5
1.1
1.9
(Kgs)
Key Features of the Oliver Ball Valve range
Enclosed soft seats giving positive sealing and low torque operation across the pressure range
One-piece spindle with anti-blowout shoulder that maintains seal integrity at all pressures
Precision machined ball for smooth operation through 90 degrees to give straight through bore
Either PTFE or Grafoil spindle and body seals to give high body integrity
316 stainless steel one-piece handle
Standard Specification
Pressure: 6000psi
Seals: PTFE
Temp: 120 deg C (PTFE/PVDF) or 200 deg
C (PTFE/KEL-F and PEEK)
Seats: PTFE/PVDF, PTFE/KEL-F or PEEK

Thread form: NPT
Handle: Lever
Ordering Code
(Typical example)
B6FX
50
BT
Type
B6 = Ball valve 6000 psi
F = Female x Female
X = 10mm bore
Y = 14mm bore
Z = 20mm bore
Size (bore sizes available)

25 - 1/4" (X=10mm)
38 - 3/8 (X=10mm)
50 - 1/2" (X=10mm/Y=14mm)
75 - 3/4 (Y=14mm/Z=20mm)
10 - 1 (Z=20mm)
Material
S - 316S31 Stainless Steel
M - Monel (400)
HC - Hastalloy C276
(Others available)
Optional Connections (NPT Standard)

BT - BSP Taper
BP - BSP Parallel (top sealing)
SW - Socket Weld
Options
FS - Firesafe to BS6755 Pt2/API 607 Rev4
HL - Handle Locking
KF - PTFE/Kel-F seats (10mm only)
NA - NACE MR-01-75 (latest revision)
OH - Oval Handle
PE - Pinned End Connectors (prevents accidental removal)
PMHB - 4 x M5 mounting holes in base for panel mounting
PMHT - 4 x M5 mounting holes in top for panel mounting
Oliver Valves Ltd, Parkgate Industrial Estate, Knutsford, Cheshire, WA16 8DX. United Kingdom.
T: +44 (0)1565 632636 E: sales@valves.co.uk. W: www.valves.co.uk
Oliver Valves Ltd 2009
FS
25
Rose

35151508
Hochwertige Gehusesysteme fr aggressive

Umgebungen nach ATEX Richtlinie
Klemmengehuse mit Einbauten fr erhhte

Sicherheit und Eigensicherheit
Gehuse mit EG-Baumusterprfung fr
individuelle Einbauten
hohe Edelstahlgte 1.4404 (316 L)
Technische Daten:
Explosionsschutz:
EEx e II T6 (erhhte Sicherheit)

EEx ia IIC T6 (Eigensicherheit)
EEx e(ia) IIC T6 (gemischte Bestckung
II2G (fr Dmpfe, Gase, Nebel)
Prfscheine:
Leergehuse: PTB 00 ATEX 1101U

Klemmengehuse: PTB 00 ATEX 1052
Material:
Edelstahl 1,25 mm/1,5 mm; 1.4404 / 316 L
Schutzart:
IP 66 nach EN 60529
Schlagfestigkeit:
>7 Joule, EN 50014
Dichtung:
VMQ (Silikon), EMV auf Anfrage
Temperaturbestndigkeit:
-20 C bis +40 C
erweiterter
Temperaturbereich:
mit spezieller Bescheinigung -55 bis

+100C
Programmbersicht
Bestell-Nr.
Abmessungen (mm)
Ex e
Ex ia
Leergehuse Lnge
Breite
Hhe
35.10 10 06
36.10 10 06
34.10 10 06
100
100
61
35.15 10 06
36.15 10 06
34.15 10 06
150
100
61
35.15 15 08
36.15 15 08
34.15 15 08
150
150
81
35.20 10 06
36.20 10 06
34.20 10 06
200
100
61
35.20 20 08
36.20 20 08
34.20 20 08
200
200
81
35.20 20 12
36.20 20 12
34.20 20 12
200
200
121
35.30 15 08
36.30 15 08
34.30 15 08
300
150
81
35.30 20 08
36.30 20 08
34.30 20 08
300
200
81
35.30 20 12
36.30 20 12
34.30 20 12
300
200
121
35.30 30 12
36.30 30 12
34.30 30 12
300
300
121
35.30 30 16
36.30 30 16
34.30 30 16
300
300
161
35.38 38 16
36.38 38 16
34.38 38 16
380
380
161
35.40 15 08
36.40 15 08
34.40 15 08
400
150
81
35.40 20 12
36.40 20 12
34.40 20 12
400
200
121
35.40 30 16
36.40 30 16
34.40 30 16
400
300
161
35.50 30 16
36.50 30 16
34.50 30 16
500
300
161
35.50 40 16
36.50 40 16
34.50 40 16
500
400
161
35.60 20 12
36.60 20 12
34.60 20 12
600
200
121
26
Ceag

GHG 261 0005 R0009
Betriebsanleitung
Explosionsgeschtzter Sicherheitsschalter
10A, GHG261
Operating instructions
Explosion-protected safety switch
10A, GHG261
Mode demploi
Interrupteur de scurit 10A, GHG261 pour
atmosphres explosibles
GHG 260 7007 P0002 D/E/F (A)
Explosionsgeschtzter
Sicherheitsschalter 10A,
GHG 261
Explosion-protected safety
switch 10A, GHG 261
Interrupteur de scurit 10A,

GHG 261 pour atmosphres
explosibles
Inhalt:
Contents:
Contenu:
1
1.1
1.2
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
7
8
9
10
Inhalt....................................
Mabild................................
2
3
Technische Angaben............
Sicherheitsschalter...............
Hilfskontakt..........................
Sicherheitshinweise.............
Normenkonformitt..............
Verwendungsbereich............
Verwendung/
Eigenschaften......................
Installation...........................
Montage..............................
ffnen des Gertes/
Elektrischer Anschluss.........
Kabel- und Leitungseinfhrung; Verschlussstopfen................................
Schlieen des Gertes.........
Inbetriebnahme....................
Instandhaltung/Wartung.......
Reparatur / Instandsetzung
nderungen.........................
Entsorgung / Wiederverwertung...........................
Konformittserklrung..........
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
1
1.1
1.2
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
4-5
6.3
5
5
5
5
6.4
6.5
7
8
9
10
5
5
13
Contents..............................
Dimensional drawings..........
2
6
Technical data......................
Safety switch.......................
Auxiliary contact..................
Safety instructions...............
Conformity with standards...
Field of application...............
Application/Properties..........
Installation...........................
Mounting..............................
Opening apparatus /
Electrical connection............
Cable entry (KLE);
blanking plug.......................
Closing apparatus................
Putting into operation...........
Maintenance/Servicing.........
Repairs/Modifications..........
Disposal/Recycling..............
Declaration of conformity.....
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7-8
8
8
8
8
8
8
13
Contenu................................
Plans cots...........................
1
1.1
1.2
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
7
8
9
10
CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH
Caractristiques
techniques............................
Interrupteur de scurit.........
Contact auxiliaire..................
Consignes de scurit...........
Conformit avec les
normes..................................
Domaine dutilisation.............
Utilisation/Proprits.............
Installation.............................
Montage................................
Ouverture de lappareil/
Raccordement lectrique......
Entres de cble (KLE)
bouchons de fermeture.........
Fermeture de lappareil/
Fermeture du couvercle.........
Mise en service.....................
Maintien/Entretien.................
Rparation/Remise
en tat/Modifications............
vacuation des dchets/
Recyclage.............................
Dclaration de conformit.....
2
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10-11
11
11
11
11
11
11
13
Explosion-protected safety switch 10A, GHG 261
Dimensions in mm
X = fixing dimensions
Technical data
1.1
Safety switch GHG 261 ..
Marking acc. to 94/9/EC:
Explosion category:
EC type examination certificate:
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Perm. short circuit back-up fuse:
Switching capacity AC 3:
Perm.ambient temperature:
II 2 G
EEx ed II C T6
PTB 00 ATEX 1074
500 V, 50/60 Hz
10A
up to UN400V
up to UN500
20A gL
16A gL
10A
10A
-20 C up to +40 C (standard version)
Deviating temperatures possible with special versions.
Perm.storage temperature in original packing:

Degree of protection. to EN 60529/IEC 529:
Insulation class acc. to EN 60598 / IEC 598:
GHG 261 ..
Cable entries (standard version):

M20 5-13mm / M25 8-17mm
Terminals:
Test torques:
Cap nut of the cable entry M20
Cap nut of the cable entry M25
Cover screws
Terminals main contacts
Terminals auxiliary contact
1.2
Auxiliary contact:
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Switching capacity:
Design with gold-tipped contact:
Terminals:
Safety instructions
The safety switches GHG 261 are
not suited for use in Zone 0.
The temperature class and

type of protection stated on the apparatus
shall be observed.
To ensure adherence to the temperature
class stated on the type label of the
apparatus, the permissible ambient
temperature, the rated terminal cross
section and the self heating of the
apparatus that is mainly due to the power
dissipation shall be taken into account (test
criterion for the self heating is an overload
of 10%).
Modifications or changes to the safety
switches are not permitted.
They shall be used for their intended
purpose and shall be in a perfect and clean
state.
Only original CEAG parts may be used as
replacements and for repairs.
Repairs that affect the explosion protection

may only be carried out by CEAG or by a
qualified electrician in compliance with the
respective national regulations.
Prior to being put into operation, the
control units shall be checked in
accordance with the instructions as per
section 6.
Before initial operation, any foreign matter
shall be removed from the apparatus.
Warning:
The covers of the safety switches can only
be removed when the switch is in the ON
position.
The national safety rules and regulations
for the prevention of accidents, as well as
the safety instructions included in these
operating instructions, that, like this text,
are set in italics, shall be observed!
-50 C to +80 C
IP 66 (standard version)
I - plastic terminal boxes fulfil this requirement
II - with metal flange
3-pole version
6-pole version
1 x M20 + 2 x M25
2 x 1,5 - 2,5 mm
2,5 Nm
3,5 Nm
2,5 Nm
2,5 Nm
2,5 Nm
500 V, 50/60Hz
10A
16A gL up to UN500 V
AC 15
230V / 6,0A
DC 13
24V / 2,0A
max 400mA
2 x 0,5 - 2,5 mm
400V / 4,0A
230V / 0,5A
Conformity with standards
The safety switches meet the requirements of

EN 50014, EN 50018 and EN 50019
(comparable international standards IEC 79-0,
IEC 79-1, IEC 79-7).
94/9 EC: Equipment and protective systems
intendet for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
The safety switches fulfil further requirements
such as those of the EC directive on
electromagnetic compatibility (89/336/EEC).
They have been designed, manufactured and
tested according to the state of the art and to
DIN EN ISO 9001.
The enclosure materials used, including any

external metal parts, are high quality materials
that ensure a corrosion resistance and
resistance to chemical substances according
to the requirements for use in a normal
industrial atmosphere
Fig. 1
- impact resistant polyamide

- special steel AISI 316 L.
When used in extremely aggressive
atmospheres, the additional data relating to
the chemical resistance of the plastics being
used shall be taken from the data sheet
GHG 902 4001 P0001.
Fig. 2
Apparatus holder size 1
for wall and trellis fixing
Application / Properties
The safety switches are designed for the safe

isolation of the electrical energy at all poles
while maintenance, cleaning and repair work
is being carried out on equipment, machinery
and drives in potentially explosive
atmospheres. See technical data, page 6, for
the temperature class, explosion group and
permissible ambient temperature.
Due to the AC 3 motor switching capacity of

the safety switches, reliable isolation
(switching) is also possible during operation.
Apparatus holder size 1 for pipe fixing
C = screw fixing points for safety switch

GHG 261, 10A
Fig. 3
Wiring diagram
In addition to this, the safety switches are so

designed, that they also switch off the drive,
e.g. via the contactor that precedes the
auxiliary contact. In relation to the main
contacts, this auxiliary contact is lagging while
making and leading while breaking.
The safety switches GHG 261 are intended for

use in potentially explosive atmospheres in
zones 1,2 and 11 in accordance with IEC 7910.
Installation
The relevant national regulations(e.g. Elex V,

the equipment safety law for Germany) and
the generally recognized rules of engineering
apply for the installation and operation.
The improper installation and operation of

safety switches may result in the
invalidation of the guarantee.
6.1
Mounting
Before mounting the safety switch, the cover

has to be removed from the enclosure base.
For this, the switch has to be set to the ON
position.
When the safety switches are mounted
directly onto the wall, they shall rest evenly
only on the fastening points provided for this
purpose.
The screw chosen shall fit the fixing hole (see
dimensional drawings, page 6) and shall not
damage the hole (e.g. use of a washer).
The apparatus shall be fixed diagonally with a
minimum of 2 screws.
If the screws are overtightened, the

apparatus may be damaged.
The safety switches fulfil the isolating

properties according to DIN EN 60 947-3,
(IEC 947-3).
The safety switches GHG 261 are suited for

mounting on CEAG apparatus holders size 1
by means of self-cutting screws (see Fig. 2).
The EMERGENCY-STOP version conforms

to the requirements of DIN EN 60 204-1, (IEC
204-1).
See the respective mounting instructions.
To prevent unauthorized switching, the

switches can be locked in the OFF position
by means of 3 padlocks, see Fig. 1, (shackle
diameter of the padlocks up to 4-6 mm).
The data according to sections 3 and 4

shall be taken into account during use.
Field of application
Due to the mechanical design of the safety

switch, compulsory opening of the contacts is
possible.
A built-in locking device prevents the opening

of the enclosure in the OFF position.
The sole responsibility with respect to the

suitability and proper use of the control
switches with regard to the basic
requirements of these instructions (see
technical data) lies with the operator.
Applications other than those described

are not permissible without a written
declaration of consent from Messrs. CEAG.
During operation the instructions stated in
section 7 of the operating instructions shall
be observed.
6.2
Opening apparatus /
The electrical connection of the apparatus

may only be carried out by specialists.
Before opening the apparatus, ensure that
it has been isolated from the voltage
supply or to take suitable protective
measures.
Before opening, set the switch to the ON
position.
The properly bared conductors of cables shall
be connected with due regard to the
respective regulations.
To maintain the explosion protection,

conductors shall be connected with special
care.
The insulation shall reach up to the
terminal. The conductor itself shall not be
damaged.
The minimum and maximum conductor cross
sections that can be connected shall be
observed (see technical data, page 6).
All screws and/or nuts of connection
terminals, including those not in use, shall be
tightened down securely.
Excessive tightening may affect or damage

the connection.
The standard terminals are designed for the
direct connection of conductors with copper
wires.
If multi- or fine-wire connection cables are
used, the wire ends shall be handled
according to the applicable national and
international regulations (e.g. use of multicore
cable ends).
The position of the connection terminals is
shown in the wiring diagrams on the switch
base and in Fig. 3 on page 7 of the operating
instructions.
To ensure that the safety switch closes
correctly, switching at the switch shaft of the
switch insert is not permitted when the
apparatus is open.
If, to facilitate the feeding of conductors into
the enclosure, the switch insert is removed
from the enclosure base, it shall be put back
correctly before the electrical connection is
made.
6.3
Cable entries (KLE);

blanking plugs
Generally only certified cable entries and

blanking plugs may be used.
Flexible cables shall be used with trumpetshaped cable glands or other suitable
entries with additional pull relief.
When fitting cable entries, care has to be

taken that the sealing inserts are suitable for
the cable diameter.
In the case of sealing inserts that are cut out,
it is necessary to ensure that the insert is
properly adapted to the cable diameter.
In order to ensure the required minimum
degree of protection, the cable entries shall be
Overtightening can impair the degree of

protection.
Warning: When tightening the cap nut of
the metal cable entry (e.g. type E1WF/e),a
suitable tool shall be used to safeguard the
gland against twisting.
Any unused metric CEAG cable entries shall
be sealed with the blanking plug certified for
these metric cable entries.
Warning: Metal flanges, metal plates and

metal glands shall be incorporated in the
potential equalization.
6.4
Any foreign matter shall be removed from

the apparatus.
Prior to opening the enclosure, it is

necessary to ensure that the voltage supply
has been isolated or to take suitable
protective measures.
The necessary intervals between servicing
depend upon the specific application and
shall be stipulated by the operator according
to the respective operating conditions.
During servicing, special attention shall be
given to checking the parts on which the
explosion protection depends (e.g. intactness
of the flameproof components, the enclosure,
the seals and cable entries).
If, in the course of servicing, it is ascertained,
that repairs are necessary, section 8 of these
operating instructions shall be observed.
Repairs / Overhaul /
Modifications
Only original CEAG parts shall be used for

carrying out repairs.
When fitting the apparatus cover, care shall

be taken to ensure that the switch shaft of
the switch insert engages correctly in the
carrier hole of the switch handle.
In the event of damage to the flameproof

encapsulation, replacement of these
components is mandatory. In case of
doubt, the respective apparatus shall be
sent to CEAG for repair.
To ensure the required minimum degree of

protection, the cover screws shall be
tightened down.
Overtightening may impair the degree of

protection.
6.5
Putting into operation
In order to ensure the minimum degree of

protection, any unused entry holes shall be
sealed with certified blanking plugs.
The improper operation of safety switches

may result in the invalidation of the
guarantee.
The valid national regulations for the

servicing / maintenance of electrical
apparatus for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres shall be observed (e.g. ElexV,
VDE 0105, Part 9 in Germany).
The switch handle on the cover of the switch

is to be set to the "ON" position.
The relevant mounting directives for cables

entries being used shall be observed.
Maintenance / Servicing
Closing apparatus
Before putting the apparatus into operation,

the tests specified in the individual national
regulations shall be performed.
In addition to this, before being put into
operation, the correct functioning of the
apparatus and installation of the apparatus
shall be checked in accordance with these
operating instructions and other applicable
regulations.
When using cable entries with a degree of

protection that is lower than the IP protection
of the apparatus (see page 6), the degree of IP
protection for the complete unit is reduced.

Apparatus modifications or design changes
are not permitted; excepted from this is the
fitting of additional cable entries within the
scope of the apparatus approvals.
Disposal / Recycling
The respective valid national regulations for

waste disposal shall be observed when
disposing of apparatus.
To facilitate the recycling of individual parts,
parts made of moulded plastic shall bear the
marking for the type of plastic used.
The product range is subject to changes and
additions.
EG-Konformittserklrung
EC-Declaration of conformity
CE-Dclaration de conformit
PTB 00 ATEX 1074
Wir / we / nous

Neuer Weg Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
erklren in alleiniger Verantwortung, da die

hereby declare in our sole responsibility, that the
dclarons de notre seule responsabilit, que les
Sicherheitsschalter 10A
safety switches 10A
interrupteurs de scurit 10A
GHG 261 ..
auf die sich diese Erklrung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen oder normativen Dokumenten bereinstimmen.
which are the subject of this declaration, are in conformity with the following standards or normative documents.
auquel cette dclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants.
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie

Te r m s o f t h e d i re c t i v e
Prescription de la directive
Titel und/oder Nr. sowie Ausgabedatum der Norm

Title and/or No. and date of issue of the standard
Titre et/ou No. ainsi que date dmission des normes
94/9 EG: Gerte und Schutzsysteme zur

bestimmungsgemen Verwendung in
explosionsgefhrdeten Bereichen.
EN 50 014: 1997
EN 50 018: 1994
EN 50 019: 1994
EN 60 529: 1991
EN 60 947-1-2-5: 1999
EN 60 999: 1994
EN 61 058-1: 1992+A1
94/9 EC: Equipment and protective

systems intended for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres.
94/9 CE: Appareils et systmes de
protection destins tre utiliss
en atmosphre explosibles.
89/336 EG: Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
89/336 EC: Electromagnetic compatibility
89/336 CE: Compatibilit lectromagntique
EN 60 947-1: 1999
Eberbach, den 15.11.2000

Ort und Datum
Place and date
Lieu et date
Leiter der Koordinierung

Head of the coordinating function
Chef du bureau de coordination
Leiter des Qualittswesens

Head of quality assurance dept.
Chef du dpt. assurance de qualit
Fr den Sicheren Betrieb des Betriebsmittels sind die Angaben der zugehrigen Betriebsanleitung zu beachten.
For the safe use of this apparatus, the informations given in the accompanying operating instructions must be followed.
Afin dassurer le bon fonctionnement de nos appareils, prire de respecter les directives du mode demploi correspondent ceux-ci.
13
"Se for necessria a traduo destas

instrues de operao para outro
idioma da
Unio Europeia, pode solicita-la junto do
seu representante CEAG"
"Se desiderate la traduzione del

manuale operativo in unaltra lingua
della Comunit Europea
potete richiederla al vostro
rappresentante CEAG"
"Montagevejledningen kan oversttes til

andre EU-sprog og rekvireres hos Deres
CEAG leverandr"
"Indien noodzakelijk kan de vertaling van

deze gebruiksinstructie in een andere
EU-taal worden
opgevraagd bij Uw CEAG vertegenwoordiging"
"Tarvittaessa tmn kyttohjeen

knns on saatavissa toisella EU:n
kielell Teidn
CEAG - edustajaltanne"
"En versttning av denna montage- och

sktselinstruktion till annat EU - sprk
kan vid behov
bestllas frn Er CEAG- representant"
" ,

,

CEAG"

Neuer Weg - Nord 49
D 69412 Eberbach / Germany
Telefon 06271 / 81- 500
Telefax 06271 / 81- 476
Internet: http://www.CEAG.de
E-Mail: Info @ ceag.de
GHG 260 7007 P0002 (A)

SMC 02.01 Eberbach
"En caso necesario podr solicitar de su

representante CEAG estas instrucciones
de servicio en
otro idioma de la Union Europea"
30
Ceag
Light switch
GHG 273 2000 R0018
Betriebsanleitung
Explosionsgeschtzte Installationsschalter
GHG 273
Explosion protected installation switches

GHG 273
Mode demploi
Interrupteur d clairage pour atmosphres

explosives Type: GHG 273
GHG 270 7003 P0001 D/EF/ (F)
Explosionsgeschtzte
Installationsschalter,
Typ GHG 273
Explosion protected
installation switches,
type GHG 273
Interrupteurs dclairage
pour atmosphres explosives,
type GHG 273
Inhalt:
Contents:
Contenu:
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
Inhalt..................................
Mabild..............................
Anschlussbilder..................
Technische Angaben.........
Sicherheitshinweise..........
Normenkonformitt...........
Verwendungsbereich.........
Verwendung/
Eigenschaften.................
Installation.......................
Montage...........................
ffnen des Gertes/
Elektrischer Anschluss....
Kabel- und Leitungseinfhrung; Verschlussstopfen............................
Flansch-u. Metallplatten.
Schlieen des Gertes....
Inbetriebnahme...............
Instandhaltung / Wartung
Reparatur / Instandsetzung/ nderungen......
Entsorgung / Wiederverwertung.......................
Konfornittserklrung.......
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
4-5
5
5
5
5
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
5
5
12
Contents.............................
Dimensional drawings.........
Wiring diagrams...................
Technical Data.....................
Application/ Properties.........
Installation............................
Mounting..............................
Opening the device /
Cable entry (KLE);
blanking plug.......................
Flange and metal plates.......
Closing the device................
Taking into operation............
Repairs/Modification.............
Disposal/Recycling...............
Declaration of conformity......
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7-8
8
8
8
8
8
8
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
Contenu................................
Plans cots...........................
Schma des
connexions...........................
Caractristiques
techniques............................
Conformit avec les
normes..................................
Installation............................
Montage................................
Ouverture de la bote /
Plaques brides...................
Fermeture de la bote /
Fermeture du couvercle........
Mise en service....................
Maintien/Entretien................
Rparation/Remise
en tat..................................
Recyclage............................
Dclaration de conformit...
2
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10-11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
Explosions protected installation switches,

type GHG 273
Dimensions in mm
Technical data

Explosion category:
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Short circuit back-up fuse:
Switching capacity
AC 5a:
Switching capacity
AC 5b:
Perm. ambient temperature:
Special versions permit deviating temperature ranges.
X = Fixing dimensions
Perm. storage temperature in original packing:

Protection category acc. to EN 60529/IEC 529:
Insulation class acc. to EN 60598/IEC 598:
Cable entry (catalogue version):
On-Of
On-Offf switch 2-pole
Change over switch 1S+1
3.5 Nm
2.5 Nm
2.5 Nm
approx. 0.32 kg
Safety instructions
The installation switches are not

suitable for Zone 0 hazardous
areas.
The installation switches meet the requirements of EN 50014, EN 50018 and EN 50019
(comparable international standards IEC 79-0,
IEC 79-1, IEC 79-7).
Modifications to the installation switches

or changes of their design are not
permitted.
purpose and in perfect and clean
condition.
For replacement and repair only genuine
CEAG spare parts shall be used.
Repairs that affect the explosion
protection, may only be carried out by
CEAG or a qualified electrician in
compliance with the respective national
regulations.
Prior to taking the installation switches
into operation, they shall be checked in
accordance with the instruction as per
section 6.
Push button switch 1S+1
Before the initial operation, any foreign

matter shall be removed from the
installation switches.
Observe the national safety rules and
regulations for prevention of accidents as
well as the safety instructions included in
these operating instructions and set in
italics the same as this text!
-40 C bis +80 C

IP 66 ( catalogue version)
I - is complied with by the installation switches
1x M25 or 2x M25 ( 8 -17mm)
2x drilling M20
2x 1.5 - 2.5 mm
4x 1.5 - 2.5 mm
Supply terminal:
PE - terminal:
Test torques:
Cap nut of the M25 entry
Cover screws
Terminals
Weight (catalogue version):
The temperature class and explosion group

marked on the installation switches shall
be observed.
Wiring diagrams
II 2 G
EEx de II C T6
PTB 98 ATEX 3121
up to 250 V; 50/60 Hz
max. 16 A
max. 20 A gL
230 V / 16A
230 V / 16A
-20 C up to +40 C (catalogue version)

intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
The installation switches also fulfil further
requirements such as those of the directive on
electromagnetic compatibility (89/336/EEC).
DIN EN ISO 9001.
The plugs and sockets GHG 512 are suitable

for use in Zone 1 and 2 and 11) hazardous
areas acc. to VDE 0165 and IEC 79-14!
The enclosure materials employed, including
the exterior metal parts, are made of highquality materials which ensure a corrosion
protection and resistance to chemical
substances corresponding to the requirements
in a normal industrial atmosphere:
- special steel AISI 316 L
In case of use in an extremely aggressive
atmosphere, the additional data on the
employed plastic materialsresistance against
chemicals should be taken from the data sheet
GHG 902 4001 P0001.

type GHG 273
Fig. 1
Size 1 apparatus holder
Fastening holes "B"
for walland
channel
fixing
Use/Properties
The installation switches are designed for

switching on and off light circuits in hazardous
areas up to 16 A (see technical data). The
temperature class, explosion group and
permissible ambient temperature, see
technical data.
6.2
The switch rocker is provided with a

luminescent label in acc. with 7 of the
Workshop regulations and free from any
radioactive additives.
The electrical connection of the device may

only be carried out by skilled staff.
The data as per point 3 and 4 shall be

taken into account with the use.
Applications other than described are not
permitted without CEAGs prior written
consent.
For the operation, the instructions stated in
be observed.
Installation
For the mounting and operation, the

respective national regulations (e. g. ElexV,
equipment safety law for Germany) as well as
the general rules of engineering shall be
observed.
Fig. 2
Enclosure base
- entry from bottom
side-
Switch base
- PE - terminal on the bottom
Enclosure cover
- type label on bottom
The respective mounting instructions shall be

observed.
The installation switches can also be used in a

normal industrial area.
The user alone is responsible for the

appropriate use of this installation switch
in consideration of the basic conditions
existing at the plant (see technical data).
for pipe
fixing
The installation switch is suitable for fixing

onto CEAG apparatus holders size 1 by
means of self-cutting screws (see fig. 1).
6.1
Mounting
The installation switches can be mounted

without opening their enclosure.
In case the switches are mounted directly
onto the wall, they may rest evenly only at the
respective fastening points. The chosen screw
shall match the fastening hole (see dimensional drawing) and it must not damage the hole
(e. g. use of a washer). The device shall be
fastened diagonally with at least 2 screws.
apparatus can be damaged.
When the installation switch is mounted with
the cable entries on bottom side, the switch
insert and the enclosure cover must be turned
through 180 (see fig.2).
Opening the device/

The insulation of the conductors shall

reach up to the terminal. The conductor
itself shall not be damaged.
Taking into account the respective regulations,
the properly bared conductors of the cables
shall be connected.
If the installation switch is mounted with the
cable entries on bottom, point 6.1 and fig 2
will have to be observed.
After dismantling the switch base in order to
facilitate the introduction of cables, such
switch base will have to be properly fitted in
again prior to the electrical connection.
The connectible min. and max. conductor
cross-sections will have to be observed (see
technical data).
All screws and/or nuts of the supply terminals,
also of those remaining vacant, shall be
tightened down.
The conductors shall be connected with
special care in order to maintain the
explosion category.
The supply terminals are designed for the
connection of copper conductors. If multi- or
fine-wire connecting cables are used, the wire
ends will have to be handled in acc. with the
applicable national and international rules
(e. g. use of ferrules).
6.3

blanking plugs
Generally, only certified cable entries and

blanking plugs are permitted for use.
entries with additional pull-relief.

type GHG 273
Attention: When tightening the cap nut of

the metal cable entry (e.g.type E1WF/e ),
the screwing is to be protected against
twisting by means of a suitable tool.
Fig. 3
Enclosure base
PE - connection
PE conductors fed from outside are to be

connected to the PE terminal provided on the
flange. The maximum cross-section is 6 mm
6.5
Metal flange for

metal cable glands
When using cable entries with a lower

IP protection than that which applies to the
device (see page 6, technical data), the
IP protection of the whole device will be
reduced.
The mounting directives applicable to the
cable entries used shall be observed.
Unused holes shall be closed with a certified
blanking plug in order to establish the
minimum protection category.
In case of sealing inserts that are cut out, it
shall be ensured that the insert is properly
adapted to the cable diameter. Care has to be
taken that when fitting the cable entries,
sealing inserts appropriate to the cable
diameter are used.
protection category, the cable glands are to be
tightened down.
Closing the device/

cover closure
6.4
Flange and metal plates
If flange plates have to be removed in case of

installation switches (e.g. for drilling entry
holes), attention shall be paid to the proper fit
of the flange plate when mounting them in
order to maintain the minimum protection
category (see fig. 3).
Flange plates shall be fitted so that the IP
protection in maintained. Pay attention to the
proper seat of the sealing.
Attention: Metal flanges, metal plates and
metal cable glands shall be included in the
equipotential earth connection.
If during servicing repairs prove to be

necessary, section 8 of these operating
instructions will have to be observed.
The enclosure cover shall be fitted so that the

protective collar is on the upper part.
the apparatus.
protection category, the cover screws are to
be tightened down.
Overtightening might impair the protection
category.
6.6
Taking into operation
Prior to taking the apparatus into operation,

the tests specified in the relevant national
regulations will have to be carried out. Apart
from that, the correct functioning and
installation of the apparatus in accordance
with these operating instructions and other
applicable regulations will have to be
checked.
Incorrect installation and use of the
installation switches can invalidate the
guarantee.
Overtightening might impair the protection

category.
All vacant metric CEAG cable entries shall be
closed with the certified CEAG blanking plug
for metric cable entries.
When servicing the apparatus, particularly

those parts that are decisive for the type of
protection against explosion, will have to be
checked (e. g. intactness of flameproof
enclosed components, enclosure, cable
glands, efficacy of the cover gaskets).
Maintenance/Servicing
The relevant national regulations which apply

to the maintenance/servicing of electrical
apparatus in explosive atmospheres, shall be
observed (in Germany e. g. ElexV, VDE 0105
part 9).
Before opening the enclosure make sure that
the apparatus is disconnected from the
voltage, or take the appropriate protective
measures.
The required maintenance intervals depend on
the respective application and will therefore
have to be determined by the user dependent
on the conditions of use.
Modification
Repairs may only be carried out with genuine

CEAG spare parts.
In case of a damaged flameproof enclosure,
only its replacement is permitted. In case of
doubt, the respective apparatus will have to
be returned for repair to CEAG.
Repairs that affect the explosion
protection, may only be carried out by
CEAG or a qualified electrician in
compliance with the applicable national
rules.
Modifications to the apparatus or changes
of its design are not permitted.
Except for the mounting of additional cable
entries in accordance with the approval of the
apparatus.
When the apparatus is disposed of, the

respective national regulations on waste
disposal will have to be observed.
In order to facilitate the recycling of individual
components, plastic parts have been provided
with the identification mark of the plastic
material used.
Subject to modifications or supplement of the
product range.
PTB 98 ATEX 3121
Wir / we / nous

Neuer Weg Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach

Installationsschalter
installation switch
interrupteur d' clairage
GHG 273
auf die sich diese Erklrung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen oder normativen Dokumenten bereinstimmen.
auquel cette dclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants

Te r m s o f t h e d i re c t i v e


EN 50 014: 1997
EN 50 019: 1994
EN 60 529: 1991
EN 60 947-1-5: 1997
EN 60 999: 1994
EN 61 058-1: 1992+A1
IEC 364-5-51
VDE 0100 T550

89/336 EG:
89/336 EC:
89/336 CE:
Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
Electromagnetic compatibility
Compatibilit lectromagntique
EN 60 947-1: 1999

Ort und Datum
Place and date
Lieu et date


12

idioma da Unio Europeia, pode solicitala junto do seu representante CEAG"

de servicio en

CEAG leverandr"

deze gebruiksinstructie in een andere EUtaal worden

knns on saatavissa toisella
EU:n kielell Teidn CEAGedustajaltanne"

sktselinstruktion till annat EU - sprk kan
vid behov bestllas frn Er CEAGrepresentant"
"Ean creiasqei, metajrash

twn odhgiwn crhsewV se allh glwssa thV EE,
mporei na zhthqei apo ton Antiproswpo thV
CEAG"
GHG 270 7003 P0001 (F)

MCD 05.00 Eberbach
"Se desiderate la traduzione del manuale

operativo in unaltra lingua della Comunit
Europea potete richiederla al vostro

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Telefon 06271 / 81- 02
Telefax 06271 / 81- 488
31
Ceag
Lighting
eLLK92018/18
Betriebsanleitung
Explosionsgeschtzte Leuchten
Serie: eLLK 92, eLLM 92
Explosion protected light fittings
Series: eLLK 92, eLLM 92
Mode demploi
Luminaires pour atmosphres
explosives
Srie: eLLK 92, eLLM 92
3 2216 000 165(C)
Crouse-Hinds
Schaltplne / Wiring diagrams / Schmas de connexions
Schaltplan Serie eLLK/M 92... (18W, 36W, 58W)

Wiring diagram series eLLK/M 92... (18W, 36W, 58W)
Schma des connexions, srie eLLK/M 92... (18W, 36W, 58W)
eLLM 92 ...
eLLK 92 ...
L1
N
LL
LL
Nur bei Durchgangsverdrahtung

Only for through-wiring
Seulement en cas
dinterconnexion
LL
FS
LL1
LL2
Nur bei zweilampiger Ausfhrung.

Only double lamp variant.
Seulement pour luminaire 2 lampes.
Klemme L dient zur Dauerstromversorgung der Notleuchten.
Terminal L serves for permanent current supply of the emergency luminaires.
La borne L sert lalimentation en courant permanent des luminaires de scurit.
Elektrische Daten/Electrical data/Caractristiques lectriques:

Ausfhrung/Version/Modle
Spannungsbereich AC 10%/voltage range AC 10%
Gamme des tensions CA 10%
Frequenzbereich/Frequency range
Gamme des frquences
Spannungsbereich DC 10%/Voltage range DC 10%
Gamme des tensions CC 10%
2x18W
1x36W
2x36W
1x58W
2x58W
110-254V
110-254V
110-254V
110-254V
220-254V
47-63Hz
47-63Hz
47-63Hz
47-63Hz
47-63Hz
110-230V
110-230V
110-230V
110-230V
220-230V
kurzzeitige berspannung AC/DC

Transient excess voltage AC/DC
Surtension transitoire CA/CC
<350V
cos j (110V)
0,955
0,995
0,995
0,995
cos j (230V)
0,98
0,98
0,98
0,98
0,98
0,38
0,32
0,38
0,32
0,70
0,61
0,55
0,48
0,18
0,16
0,18
0,16
0,34
0,31
0,27
0,25
0,61
0,53
0,48
Nennstrom in/A bei:

Rated current/A at:
Courant nom. en A avec:
Crouse-Hinds
110V AC/DC
127V AC/DC
198V AC/DC
230V AC/DC
254V AC/DC
Montagebilder
Illustrations for mounting
Illustrations du montage
188
44
1060 (18 W), 1660 (36 W)
76
130
1
732 (18 W)
1332 (36 W)
1632 (58 W)
Sechskant/Hexagon... SW 13
736 (18 W), 1336 (36 W)

M8, eLLK 92
15 tief/deep/
profond
188
46
eLLK 92
33 33
20
150
760 (18 W)
1360 (36 W)
1660 (58 W)
34
4a
150
65
130
400 (18 W)
700 (36 W)
700 (58 W)
3
4
2
Anschluraum
fr ein Kabel
Anschluraum
fr zwei Kabel
Connection
compartment
for 1 cable
Compartiment
de raccordement
pour 1 cble
Connection
compartment
for 2 cables
Compartiment
de raccordement
pour 2 cbles
6
ca. 90
ca. 90
1
2
Crouse-Hinds
8.1
9.1
1. Safety instructions
For skilled electricians and instructed
personnel in accordance with national
legislation, including the relevant standards and, where applicable, in acc. with
IEC 79-17 on electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres.
The light fitting must not be operated in
zone 0 and 20 hazardous areas!
The light fitting must not be use while
excessive deposit of dust ( 50 mm,
accd. EN 50281-1-2) exist.
The technical data indicated on the light
fitting are to be observed!
Changes of the design and modifications
to the light fitting are not permitted!
The light fitting shall be operated as intended and only in undamaged and perfect condition!
Only genuine CEAG spare parts may be
used for replacement!
(see national standard), may only be carried out by CEAG or a qualified electrician and will subsequently have to be
checked by an expert!
Do not keep these operating instructions
inside the light fitting during operation!
for prevention of accidents and the
following safety instructions which
are marked with an ( ) in these operating instruction, will have to be observed!
2. Conformity with standards

This explosion protected light fitting meets the
requirements of EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50019
and EN 60598. It also com-plies with the EC
directives for Apparatus and protective systems
for use according to the rules in hazardous areas
(94/9/EC) and Electromagnetic compatibility
(89/336/EEC).
Lamps to be fitted:
Fluorescent lamps with Fa6 single-pin
cap acc. to IEC 61-1: Osram L 18/36/58/21X
or Luma Super Ex
18/36/58 W
Light fittings with G13 bi-pin cap acc. to
81 IEC 1105-1:
eLLK/M 92 018...
81 IEC 1305-2:
eLLK/M 92 036...
81 IEC 1505-1:
eLLK 92 058...
EC type sample test
certificate:
PTB 96 ATEX 2144
Category of application:
II 2 G EEx ed IIC T4
II 2 D T 80 C
Approval of the production
quality assurance:
PTB 96 ATEX Q001-1
Protection acc. to
EN 60 529 (IEC 529): IP 66
Insulation class
to EN 60 598:
I
Ambient temperature range 1
)
eLL. 920../.. :
-20C up to + 50C
eLLK 92058/58
-20C up to + 40C
Storage temperature in original
packing:
-40C to +60C
Supply terminal clamping capacity
2 x per terminal:
single-wire multi-wire
min.
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
max.
6.0 mm2
4.0 mm2
Conductor cross-section with
through-wiring:
2.5 mm2 for max. 16 A
EEx-e cable entry
standard version:
M25x1.5 for cable
(8 to 17 mm)
metal thread:
M20x1.5
Test torque for M 25 x 1.5 EEx-e
cable entry:
5.0 Nm
Test torque for pressure
screw:
3.5 Nm
(for sealing off the cable or the blanking plug)
Wind load test to EN 60 598-2-3
for eLLM light fittings: passed for all light
source levels
Dimensions of light fittings
and for mounting:
see fig. 1
Weights of light fittings:
eLLK 92X18/18:
4.6 kg
eLLK 92X36/36.
6.7 kg
eLLK 92X58/58:
8.0 kg
eLLM 92X18/18:
6.7 kg
eLLM 92X36/36:
9.1 kg
It has been designed, manufactured and

tested according to the state of the art and
according to EN 29001 (ISO 9001).
The light fitting is suitable for use in zone 1
and 2 hazardous areas acc. to IEC 79-10.
3. Technical data
Light fittings with Fa6
single-pin cap:
eLLK 92 318/18
eLLK 92 336
eLLK 92 336/36
eLLK 92 358
eLLK 92 358/58
eLLM 92 318/18
eLLM 92 336/36
Intensive sun radiation in areas of high ambient temperatures may cause inadmissible
temperature rise inside of the luminaire. This may result a decrease in lifetime of the electronic
ballast (EVG). Therefore those luminaires should be switched off during daytime by a photocell
control.
1)
Crouse-Hinds
4. Installation
The respective national regulations
as well as the general rules of engineering which apply to the installation and operation of explosion protected apparatus will have to be observed!
Transport and storage of the
luminaire is permitted in original
packing and specified position only!
Opening and closing the light fitting
Turn the central locking device with a box
spanner (opening of the spanner SW 13)
through 90 to its lock-in position and fold
down the protective bowl, see fig. 3.
Fit in and remove the protective bowl acc.
to fig. 6 and 7.
The protective bowl can, at option, be
hinged on either side.
To close the light fitting, press the protective bowl tightly onto the luminaire housing
and turn the central locking device through
90.
Mounting dimensions: see fig. 1
When fixing the mounting accessories onto
the light fitting, observe the max. depth of
thread of 15 mm!
Do not use too long screws!
Accessories for mounting: See CEAG catalogue.
Mains connection
To open the connection box, turn the green
handle to its stop in the direction of arrow,
then pull it and fold down the flap, see fig. 4
and 5.
Introduce the cable through the EEx cable
entry, see fig. 5. Use both sealing inserts for
cables from 8 to 12 mm, and the outer sealing insert only for cables from 12 to 17 mm.
Pay attention to the proper fit of the remaining sealing insert in the cable gland.
Connect the conductors to the terminals
PE, N, L1, (L, L2, L3) in accordance with
the terminal marking (see wiring diagram,
page 2). With single connection of the terminal no bending (loop) of the conductor
required! Also tighten vacant terminals!
Attention
In case of unused cable entries, remove their
protective cover and close the entries with a
blanking plug (torque of 3.5 Nm). When closing the gland with a blanking plug, always
use both sealing inserts! When metal cable
entries are used, the protective caps of the
unused entries are to be removed and the entries to be closed with certified EEx blanking
plugs!
Installation of the eLLM 92 ...
The pole mounted light fitting is mounted and
installed in the following order:
Unscrew the three recessed head screws
in the cover of the pole connecting compartment, see fig. 2, item 1.
Open the connecting compartment by folding down the cover, see fig. 2, item 2.
Pull the stay shackle of the cable entry
socket up to its stop and take off the cover
plate, see fig. 2, item 3.
Crouse-Hinds
Remove the cable entry sockets from the

guiding grooves in in the connecting compartment.
Then the pole mounting tube or the tube of
the wall socket of 42 mm each (fig. 2,
item 4) is pushed home into the opening of
the light fitting, see fig. 2, item 4a.
Adjust the light fitting and screw down the
preassembled M 6 special screws, applying
a torque of 3.0 Nm, see fig. 2, item 5.
Introduce the cable through the tube and
strip the insulation to the required length.
Introduce the cable through the EEx cable
entry (KLE) and tighten it down with the
pressure screw of the cable entry (3.5 Nm
torque).
The complete support (with the cable being
introduced) is put into the guiding grooves
of the pole mounted light fitting, see fig. 2,
item 6.
Lock the support with the stay shackle,
see fig. 2, item 3.
Insert the cable into the pull-relief and
tighten it down, see fig. 2, item 7.
Then connect the cable in accordance with
the terminal marking.
Fitting the lamps
Only use such lamps that have been
certified for these light fittings, see
Technical data and type label!
Single-pin lamp (Fa6)
First insert one side of the lamp into the
lampholder. Then pull the opposite lampholder
slightly outwards and insert the lamp, see fig.
8.1 and 9.1.
Bi-pin lamp (G13)
The lamp is to be inserted to its stop into both
holders, see fig. 8, so that both pins on either
side of the lamp engage in the holder.
Then turn the lamp through 90 to its
lock-in position, see fig. 9, the green
surface in the holder getting visible.
Now the lamp is secured against falling out.
5. Taking into operation

Prior to operation, check the light fitting for its proper functioning and installation in compliance with these
operating instructions and other applicable regulations!
Only carry out insulation measurements between PE and the external
conductor L1 (L, L2, L3) as well as
between PE and N.
measuring voltage: max. 1 kV AC/DC
measuring current: max. 10 mA
Then the luminaire will have to be closed. The
terminal compartment of the pole mounted
light fitting (eLLM92..) is again to be covered
with the cover plate that was previously removed. To that effect, pull up the stay shackle
of the cable entry socket (fig. 2, item 3) and
clamp down the cover plate and the cable entry socket with the stay shackle. Again screw
down the cover of the terminal compartment
with the three recessed head screws.
6. Maintenance
Observe the national regulations applicable to the maintenance, servicing and test of apparatus for explosive atmospheres as well as the general rules of engineering!
Servicing
When servicing, in particular those components that affect the explosion protection, will
have to be checked, e. g.:
Housing and protective bowl for any
cracks or damages.
Gaskets for their perfect condition.
Terminals and blanking plugs for their firm
fit.
Because of the risk of an electrostatic
charge, the light fitting shall only be
cleaned with a damp, non-fibrous
cloth or sponge!
Only use customary household washingup liquid diluted in water as specified! The
water temperature may be max. 50C.
After that, rinse with clear water to prevent
the risk of tension cracks in the protective
bowl!
Lamp replacement: Keep replacement intervals as specified by the lamp manufacturer!
Crouse-Hinds
Inspection
Observe the relevant national regulations! In
Germany e. g. the user of an electrical installation in hazardous areas is under the obligation
to have it inspected by a skilled electrician
with regard to ist proper condition in accordance with ElexV 12.
Repair
Prior to replacing or removing any
components, observe the following:
Cut the apparatus off the voltage before opening it or carrying out repairs! Only use certified genuine
CEAG spare parts!
(See CEAG spare parts list).
Subject to alteration or supplement of this
product series.
Regarding waste disposal, observe the relevant national regulations!

representante CEAG estas instrucciones de
servicio en otro idioma de la Union
Europea"

instrues de operao para outro idioma
da Unio Europeia, pode solicita-la junto
do seu representante CEAG"
"Se desiderate la traduzione del manuale

operativo in unaltra lingua della Comunit
Europea
potete richiederla al vostro rappresentante
CEAG"

CEAG leverandr"

deze gebruiksinstructie in een andere EUtaal worden opgevraagd bij uw CEAG vertegenwoordiging"
"Tarvittaessa tmn kyttohjeen knns

on saatavissa toisella EU:n kielell Teidn
" ,
,
CEAG"
3 2216 000 165(C)/30/02.01/WE

Technische nderungen vorbehalten!
Betriebsanleitung gltig ab 02.2001

sktselinstruktion till annat EU - sprk kan
vid behov bestllas frn Er CEAGrepresentant"
Crouse-Hinds

Neuer Weg-Nord 49
Telefon +49 (0)6271/81-500
Telefax +49 (0)6271/81-476
E-Mail: Info@ceag.de
34
Ceag

GHG 635 1102 R0106
Betriebsanleitung
Explosionsgeschtzte Motorschutzschalter
bis 25 A, GHG 635
Explosion-protected manual motor starters

up to 25 A, GHG 635
Mode demploi
Disjoncteurs moteur jusqu' 25 A, GHG 635,

pour atmosphres explosibles
GHG 630 7011 P0003 D/E/F (C)
GHG 635
Explosionsgeschtzter
Motorschutzschalter bis 25A,
GHG 635
Explosion-protected manual Disjoncteurs moteur jusqu'

motor starters up to 25 A,
25A, GHG 635 pour
GHG 635
atmosphres explosibles
Inhalt:
Contents:
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
Inhalt....................................
Mabild................................
2
3
Technische Angaben............
Motorschutzschalter.............
Hilfskontakt..........................
Unterspannungsauslser.....
Grter Bemessungsstrom
der Kurzschlussvorsicherung
bei max. 50 kA.....................
Grter Bemessungsstrom
der Kurzschlussvorsicherung
bei max. 100 kA...................
Temperaturklasse und
Verdrahtungsquerschnitt.....
Auslsestrom und
Auslsezeit...........................
Sicherheitshinweise.............
Normenkonformitt..............
Verwendungsbereich............
Verwendung/
Eigenschaften......................
Installation...........................
Montage..............................
ffnen des Gertes/
Elektrischer Anschluss.........
Kabel- und Leitungseinfhrung; Verschlussstopfen.................................
Flansche und Metallplatten..
Schlieen des Gertes.........
Inbetriebnahme....................
Instandhaltung/Wartung.......
Reparatur / Instandsetzung
nderungen.........................
Entsorgung / Wiederverwertung...........................
Konformittserklrung..........
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6-7
7
7
7
7
7
7
18
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
Contenu:
Contents..............................
Dimensional drawings..........
2
8
Technical data......................
Manual motor starters..........
Auxiliary contact..................
Undervoltage trip.................
Max. rating current of
short-circuit back-up fuse
for max. 50 kA......................
Max. rating current of
short-circuit back-up fuse
for max. 100 kA....................
Temperature class and
conductor cross section.......
Tripping current and time.....
Conformity with standards...
Application/Properties..........
Installation............................
Mounting..............................
Opening apparatus /
Cable entry (KLE);
blanking plug.......................
Flanges and metal plates.....
Closing apparatus................
Putting into operation...........
Repairs/Modifications..........
Disposal/Recycling...............
Declaration of conformity......
8
8
8
8
1.4
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11-12
12
12
12
12
12
12
18
Contenu................................ 2
Plans cots............................ 13
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
Caractristiques
techniques.............................
Disjoncteurs moteur...............
Contact auxiliaire...................
Dclencheur sur baisse
de tension..............................
Courant max. de court-circuit
du fusible pour max. 50 kA....
Courant max. de court-circuit
du fusible pour max. 100 kA..
Classe de temprature et
diamtre des conducteurs.....
Courant et temps de
dclenchement......................
Conformit avec les
normes..................................
Installation.............................
Montage................................
Ouverture de lappareil/
Flansche und Metallplatten.
Fermeture de lappareil/
Fermeture du couvercle.........
Mise en service.....................
Maintien/Entretien.................
Rparation/Remise
en tat/Modifications.............
Recyclage.............................
Dclaration de conformit.....
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16-17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
Manual motor starters up to 25A, GHG 635
Manual motor starter GHG 635
Technical data
1.1
Manual motor starters GHG 635
Explosion category:
* Temperature class, see 1.6, page 9
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
AC 3 switching capacity:
Thermal tripping characteristic:
Tripping time:
Other temperatures possible for special versions.

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529/IEC 529:
Insulation class acc. to EN 60598 / IEC 598:
Tripping time
Diagram 1
Multiple of setting current

1=
thermal tripping
2=
electromagnetic tripping
Wiring diagram
Cable entries:
0.1A - 6.3A
6.3A - 25.0A
with auxiliary contact / undervoltage release
Supply terminals:
Test torques:
Cap nut of the cable entry M 25
Cap nut of the cable entry M 32
Cover screws
Terminals (main contacts)
Terminals (auxiliary contacts)
Terminals (under voltage contacts)
Weight:
Standard design
with auxiliary contact / undervoltage release
II 2 G
EEx ed II C T6 / T5*
PTB 99 ATEX 1162
690 V, 50/60 Hz / 440V DC
up to 25A
see point 1.4 and 1.5, page 4
690V / 25A
T II
see diagram 1, page 3, also point 1.7, page 5
-20 C up to +40 C (standard version)
-50 C to +80 C
IP 66 (standard version)
I - plastic terminal boxes fulfil this requirement
II - with metal flange
(standard version)
2 x M25 for cable
8 - 17mm
2 x M32 for cable
12 - 21mm
1 x M25 in addition
2 x 0.75 - 4.0mm or
1 x 10mm
3.5 Nm
5.0 Nm
2.5 Nm
3.5 Nm
2.5 Nm
2.5 Nm
approx. 2.45 kg
approx. 2.55 kg
1.2
Auxiliary contact
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
AC 15 switching capacity:
DC 13 switching capacity:
Terminals:
up to 400V AC
up to 2A
230V / 2A
60V / 2A
max. 10A gL
2 x 0.75 - 2.5mm
1.3
Undervoltage release
Rated voltage:
Drop value:
Starting value:
Terminals:
110V, 230V, 400V, 500V 50/60Hz

35....75 % Ec
>85 % Ec
not necessary
2 x 0.75 - 2.5mm
Dimensions in mm
X = fixing dimensions
400V / 0,5A
230V / 0,25A
1.4
Maximum rating current for short-circuit back-up fuse for max. 50 kA, if Icc > Ics *
Short circuit protection and max. back-up fuse

Setting range
0.10 A
0.16 A
0.25 A
0.40 A
0.63 A
1.00 A
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
6.30 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
16.00 A
20.00 A
1.5
Ics
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
0.16 A
0.25 A
0.40 A
0.63 A
1.00 A
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
6.30 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
16.00 A
20.00 A
25.00 A
240 V AC
gL, gG
Ics
400V AC
gL, gG
Ics
500V AC
gL, gG
Ics
690V AC
gL, gG
Short circuit proof

no back-up fuse required, up to Icc = 50 kA
40 kA
30 kA
27 kA
25 kA
22 kA
20 kA
50A
80A
80A
100A
100A
125A
40 kA
10 kA
7 kA
5 kA
4.5 kA
4 kA
3.5 kA
3 kA
25A
40A
40A
50A
50A
50A
50A
50A
Maximum rating current for short-circuit back-up fuse for max. 100 kA, if Icc > Ics *
Short circuit protection and max. back-up fuse

Setting range
0.10 A
0.16 A
0.25 A
0.40 A
0.63 A
1.00 A
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
6.30 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
16.00 A
20.00 A
Ics
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
0.16 A
0.25 A
0.40 A
0.63 A
1.00 A
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
6.30 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
16.00 A
20.00 A
25.00 A
240 V AC
gL, gG
Ics
400V AC
gL, gG
no back-up fuse required, up to Icc = 100 kA
75 kA
60 kA
55 kA
50 kA
Icc = prospective short-circuit current at installation location

Ics = Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
1.6
Temperature class and conductor cross-section
0.10 A
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
20.00 A
Temperature class
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
20.00 A
25.00 A
500V AC
gL, gG
Ics
690V AC
gL, gG
Short circuit proof
Setting range
Ics
T6
T6
T6
T6
T6
T5
T5
80A
100A
100A
125A
60 kA
40 kA
30 kA
27 kA
25 kA
22 kA
20 kA
Input
35 / 40A
50A
80A
80A
100A
100A
125A
40 kA
10 kA
7 kA
5 kA
4.5 kA
4 kA
3.5 kA
3 kA
25A
40A
40A
50A
50A
50A
50A
50A
Min. conductor cross-section

Output
0.75 mm
1.00 mm
1.00 mm
1.50 mm
2.50 mm
2.50 mm
4.00 mm
0.75 mm
1.00 mm
1.50 mm
1.50 mm
2.50 mm
2.50 mm
4.00 mm
1.7
Tripping current and tripping time
Setting range
0.10 A
0.16 A
0.25 A
0.40 A
0.63 A
1.00 A
1.60 A
2.50 A
4.00 A
6.30 A
9.00 A
12.50 A
16.00 A
20.00 A
Tripping current
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
0.16
0.25
0.40
0.63
1.00
1.60
2.50
4.00
6.30
9.00
12.50
16.00
20.00
25.00
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1.92 A
3.00 A
4.80 A
7.56 A
14.00 A
22.40 A
35.00 A
60.00 A
94.50 A
135.00 A
187.50 A
240.00 A
300.00 A
375.00 A
Safety instructions
The manual motor starters are
not suitable for zone 0
hazardous areas.
The temperature class and type of

protection stated on the apparatus shall
be observed.
Modifications or changes to the manual
motor starters are not permitted.
purpose and shall be in a perfect and clean
state.
Only original CEAG parts may be used as
replacements and for repairs.
Prior to being put into operation, the
manual motor starters shall be checked in
accordance with the instructions as per
section 6.
Before initial operation, any foreign matter
shall be removed from the apparatus.
Warning:
Observe the terminal cross sections of the
manual motor starters in table 1.6, page 9.
for the prevention of accidents, as well as
the safety instructions included in these
operating instructions, that, like this text,
are set in italics, shall be observed!
10
Tripping time in seconds for . . .-fold setting current

3-fold
4-fold
5-fold
6-fold
15.0 s
16.0 s
16.0 s
17.0 s
17.5 s
17.0 s
18.0 s
18.4 s
19.0 s
18.2 s
19.0 s
19.5 s
20.0 s
20.0 s
9.0 s
10.0 s
9.7 s
10.2 s
10.2 s
10.0 s
10.3 s
11.5 s
12.0 s
11.5 s
11.5 s
11.5 s
11.5 s
10.4 s
6.5 s
6.8 s
6.5 s
7.3 s
7.2 s
7.1 s
7.5 s
8.1 s
8.5 s
7.9 s
8.0 s
7.5 s
7.8 s
7.0 s
4.8 s
5.2 s
5.0 s
5.7 s
5.5 s
5.6 s
5.9 s
6.4 s
6.7 s
6.0 s
6.0 s
5.4 s
5.7 s
5.0 s
8-fold
3.2 s
3.6 s
3.3 s
3.9 s
3.8 s
4.0 s
4.2 s
4.6 s
4.9 s
3.8 s
4.0 s
3.3 s
3.5 s
3.2 s
Application / Properties

intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
The manual motor starters are used for the

protection of explosion-protected motors,
regardless of the explosion category, against
overload and phase failure.
The temperature class, explosion group,
tripping characteristic and permissible
ambient temperature can be found in the
technical data.
The manual motor starters fulfil further

requirements such as those of the ECdirective
on electromagnetic compatibility (89/336/
EEC).
Due to the AC 3 motor switching capacity of

the manual motor starter, a safe and reliable
isolation (switching) is also possible during
operation.

DIN EN ISO 9001.
The use of an undervoltage trip prevents the

self-starting of the motor. In addition, the
undervoltage trip can be used for
disconnecting emergency circuits.
The manual motor starters meet the

requirements of EN 50 014, EN 50 018,
EN 50 019 (comparable international
standards IEC 79-0, IEC 79-1, IEC 79-7).
The manual motor starters are suitable for use

in zone 1, 2 and 11 hazardous areas acc. to
IEC 79-10.
The enclosure materials employed, including
the exterior metal parts, are made of highquality materials which ensure a corrosion
protection and resistance to chemical
substances corresponding to the
requirements in a normal industrial
atmosphere:
- glass-fibre reinforced polyester
- special steel AISI 316 L
In case of use in an extremely aggressive
atmosphere, the additional data on the
employed plastic materialsresistance against
chemicals have to be taken from the data
sheet GHG 902 4001 P0001.
The auxiliary contact (optional) is mainly used

for signalling the operating state of the manual
motor starter.
To safeguard the manual motor starter against
unauthorized use, it can be locked in the OFF
position by means of 3 padlocking facilities
(shackle diameter of padlocks up to 5 mm).
The data according to sections 3 and 4
shall be taken into account during use.
Applications other than those described
are not permissible without a written
declaration of consent from Messrs. CEAG.
During operation the instructions stated in
be observed.
The sole responsibility with respect to the
suitability and proper use of the manual
motor starters with regard to the basic
requirements of these instructions (see
technical data) lies with the operator.
Apparatus holder for pipe fixing, size 3
Installation
The relevant national regulations(e.g. Elex V,

the equipment safety law for Germany) and
the generally recognized rules of engineering
apply for the installation and operation.
The improper installation and operation of

manual motor starters may result in the
invalidation of the guarantee.
6.1
Montage
The manual motor starter can be mounted

without opening the enclosure.
When the manual motor starters are mounted

directly onto the wall, they shall rest evenly
only on the fastening points provided for this
purpose.
The screw chosen shall fit the fixing hole (see
dimensional drawing) and shall not damage
the hole (e.g. use of a washer).

apparatus may be damaged.
The manual motor starters are suited for plugin mounting on CEAG apparatus holders, size
3, whereby they are pushed into the guide
groove from the top of the apparatus holder.
See the respective mounting instructions.
A = fixing point
for manual motor starter
Apparatus holder for wall- and channel

fixing, size 3
6.2
A = fixing points
for manual motor starter
Opening apparatus /
Before opening the apparatus, it is

necessary to ensure that there is no
voltage or to take suitable protective
measures.
All screws and/or nuts of connection

terminals, including those not in use, shall be
Excessive tightening may affect or damage
the connection.
The terminals are designed for the direct
connection of conductors with copper wires. If
multi- or fine-wire connecting cables are used,
the wire ends shall be handled according to
the applicable national and international
regulations (e.g. use of multicore cable ends).
The position of the terminals can be found in
the wiring diagram of the switch insert on
page 8, technical data.
To ensure a correct closing of the manual
motor starter, switching at the switch shaft of
the switch insert when the apparatus is open
is not permitted.
If, to facilitate the feeding of conductors into
the enclosure, the switch insert is snapped
out of the rail on the enclosure base by
releasing the catches (top or bottom on
insert), it shall be snapped back into position
in the enclosure base before the electrical
connection.
The end clamps on the DIN rail are used for
fixing the switch insert on the rail and shall
not be dismounted under any
circumstances.
The undervoltage trip is generally connected
to separate terminals(see wiring diagram on
page 8, technical data). Wiring of the
undervoltage trip according to the individual
application shall be carried out by the user.
6.3

blanking plugs
The electrical connection of the may only

be carried out by specialists.
Generally, only certified cable entries and

blanking plugs may be used.
The properly bared conductors of cables shall

be connected with due regard to the
respective regulations.
entries with additional pull-relief.
To maintain the explosion protection,

conductors shall be connected with special
care.
When using cable entries with a degree of

protection that is lower than the IP protection
of the apparatus (see page 8), the degree of
IP protection for the complete unit is reduced.
The insulation shall reach up to the

terminal. The conductor itself shall not be
damaged.
The relevant mounting directives for cables

entries being used shall be observed
The minimum and maximum conductor

cross sections that can be connected shall
be observed (see section 1.6, technical
data).
11
In order to ensure the minimum degree of

protection, any unused entry holes shall be
sealed with certified blanking plugs.
When fitting cable entries, care has to be
taken that the sealing inserts are suitable for
the cable diameter.
In the case of sealing inserts that are cut out,
it is necessary to ensure that the insert is
properly adapted to the cable diameter.
degree of protection, the cable entries shall be
Overtightening can impair the degree of
protection.
6.6
Putting into operation
Before putting the apparatus into operation,

the tests specified in the individual national
regulations shall be performed.
Flange and metal plates
If flange plates have to be dismantled, (e.g. to

drill entry holes), when replacing the plates, in
order to maintain the minimum degree of
protection, it is necessary to ensure that the
flange plate and the fixing clamp fit correctly.
PE conductors fed from outside shall be
connected to the PE terminal provided on
the flange.
Warning: Metal flanges, metal plates and
metal glands shall be incorporated in the
potential equalization.
6.5
Closing apparatus /
Cover closure

the apparatus.
The setting screw on the switch insert for
setting the rated current shall be set to the
rated motor current.
The switch handle on the cover of the manual
motor starter shall be in the position it had
when the apparatus was opened.
When fitting the apparatus cover, care shall
be taken to ensure that the switch shaft of
the switch insert engages correctly in the
carrier hole of the switch handle.
To ensure the required minimum degree of
protection, the cover screws shall be
tightened down.
Overtightening may impair the degree of
protection.
12
Modification
Only original CEAG parts shall be used for

carrying out repairs.
In addition to this, before being put into

operation, the correct functioning of the
apparatus and installation of the apparatus
shall be checked in accordance with these
operating instructions and other applicable
regulations.
In the event of damage to the flameproof

encapsulation, replacement of these
components is mandatory. In case of
doubt, the respective apparatus shall be
sent to CEAG for repair.
The improper operation of manual motor

starters may result in the invalidation of the
guarantee.

Apparatus modifications or design changes

are not permitted; excepted from this is the
fitting of additional cable entries within the
scope of the apparatus approvals.
Any unused metric CEAG cable entries shall

be sealed with the blanking plug certified for
these metric cable entries.
6.4
Maintenance / Servicing
The valid national regulations for the

servicing / maintenance of electrical
apparatus for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres shall be observed (e.g. ElexV,
VDE 0105, Part 9 in Germany).
Prior to opening the enclosure, it is
necessary to ensure that the voltage supply
has been isolated or to take suitable
protective measures.
The necessary intervals between servicing
depend upon the specific application and
shall be stipulated by the operator according
to the respective operating conditions.
During servicing, above all, the parts on which
the explosion protection depend, (e.g.
intactness of the flameproof components, the
enclosure, the seals and cable entries), and
the reset function of the switch handle shall
be checked.
If, in the course of servicing, it is ascertained,
that repairs are necessary, section 8 of these
operating instructions shall be observed.
The respective valid national regulations for

waste disposal shall be observed when
disposing of apparatus.
To facilitate recycling of individual parts, parts
made of moulded plastic shall bear the
marking for the type of plastic used.
The product range is subject to changes and
additions.
PTB 00 ATEX 1162
Wir / we / nous

Neuer Weg Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach

Motorschutzschalter bis 25A

manual motor starters up to 25A
disjoncteurs motors jusqu' 25A
GHG 635
auf die sich diese Erklrung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen
oder normativen Dokumenten bereinstimmen.
auquel cette dclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants

Te r m s o f t h e d i r e c t i v e


EN 50 014: 1997
EN 50 018: 1994
EN 50 019: 1994
EN 60 529: 1991
EN 60 269-1: 1998
EN 60 898/A18: 1998
EN 60 947-1-2-4-5: 1999
EN 60 999: 1994
EN 61 058-1: 1992+A1
VDE 0100 T 430

89/336 EG:
89/336 EC:
89/336 CE:
Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
Electromagnetic compatibility
Compatibilit lectromagntique
EN 60 947-1: 1999

Ort und Datum
Place and date
Lieu et date


18

idioma da
Unio Europeia, pode solicita-la junto do
seu representante CEAG"
"Se desiderate la traduzione del

manuale operativo in unaltra lingua
della Comunit Europea
potete richiederla al vostro

CEAG leverandr"

deze gebruiksinstructie in een andere
EU-taal worden

knns on saatavissa toisella EU:n
kielell Teidn

sktselinstruktion till annat EU - sprk
kan vid behov
bestllas frn Er CEAG- representant"
"Ean creiasqei, metajrash

twn odhgiwn
crhsewV se allh glwssa thV EE,
mporei na zhthqei apo ton
Antiproswpo thV CEAG"
GHG 630 7011 P0003 (C)

MCD 09.00 Eberbach

de servicio en

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Telefon 06271 / 81- 02
Telefax 06271 / 81- 488
35
Kitz
Ball valve
AK-UTKM 1/2"
13
Material Certificates
Item
06
07
14
-
Material
Make
Type
Certificates
Fast loop filter

Fast loop flowmeter
Flow meter
Tubing 1/2" x 0,035"
Tubing 1/2" x 0,035"
Tubing 1/4" x 0,035"
Classic
Brooks
Brooks
TPS
TPS
TPS
SF215.421/25.64S100V
MT-3809
GT-1355
316L HT# X3
316L HT# W76
316L HT# K748
EN 10204-3.1
EN 10204-3.1
EN 10204-3.1
EN 10204-3.1
EN 10204-3.1
EN 10204-3.1
06
Classic
Fast loop filter

SF215.421/25.64S100V
EN 10204-3.1
07
Brooks
Fast loop flowmeter

MT-3809
EN 10204-3.1
14
Brooks
Flow meter
MT-1355
EN 10204-3.1
TPS
Tubing
1/2" x 0,035" 316L
HT# X3
TPS
Tubing
1/2" x 0,035" 316L
HT# W76
TPS
Tubing
1/4" x 0,035" 316L
HT# K748
Abnahmeprfzeugnis
Inspection certificate / Certificat de rception
EN 10204
3.1
Zeugnis - Nr.:
Industriegebiet - D54550 Daun - F.R.Germany

Telefon 06592/712-0 Fax 06592/712380 www.tpsd.de
2008 - 8686
Blatt 1 von 2
Certificate - No./Document-No. :
Page
Werksauftrags - Nr.:
of
26301781KL
Komm.-Nr.
Commande usine No.:
Besteller:
Customer:
Client:
Merinox b.v.
NL 2952 AS Alblasserdam
Produkt/Ausfhrung:
Seamless tubes acc. Merinox Delivery

Spec. DS 11 Rev. 1
bright annealed EN 10216-5 Tab. 1 CFA
Product/execution:
Produit/execution:
Prfbedingungen:
Bestellung-Nr. 2007391
Order-No.:
Commande-No.
ASTM A 213-05c /A 269-04, ASME II Part A 2004 Edition Add. 2005, SA 213
EN 10216-5/11.04 -TC1, NACE MR0175-2003,
ASTM A 1016 average wall, EN ISO 1127 D4/T3 , EN 10305-1
Requirements:
Exigences:
Erschmelzungsart/Umschmelzung:
E.A.F. + V.O.D.
Herstellerzeichen:
Melting Process/remelting:
Procd de fusion/affinage:
Works brand mark:

Sigle de lusine productrice:
Pos.
Stck
Abmessung
Item
Poste
Pieces
Pices
Dimension
Dimension
22
486
2
Werkstoff: A/SA 213 - A 269 TP 316/TP316L

DIN EN 10216-5 1.4401/1.4404
Material:
Materil:
mtr.
x 0,035/0,036 / 20 SWG/BWG x 6000-6200 mm

x 0,035/0,036 / 20 SWG/BWG x 5800 mm
3012,50
11,60
kgs
360
2
Das Material ist bestndig gegen interkristalline Korrosion gem ASTM A 262 Pract. E und EN ISO 3651-2 Verfahren A.
The material is resisting to intergranular corrosion according to ASTM A 262 Prac. E and EN ISO 3651-2 method A.
Le materiel est resistant contre la corrosion intergranulaire selon ASTM A 262 Prac. E et EN ISO 3651-2 methode A.
Rohrmarkierung:
Tube marking:
Marquage de tubes:
A269 A/SA213 - TP316/316L - EN10216-5 1.4401/1.4404 HT# - TC1 CFA x0,035/0,036/20 SWG/BWG 6,35x0,89/0,91 - AW - works brand mark - Ident# - Lot#
Ergebnis der Prfungen:
o.k.
Result of Inspection:
Resultat de linspection:
Lsungsgeglht/abgeschreckt: 1040 C / gas

Solution annealed/quenched:
Recuits de mise en solution/trempes:
Wir besttigen, da die gelieferten Produkte den Anforderungen entsprechen.

We declare that the product is in accordance with the requirements.
Nous confirmons que les produits correspondent aux exigences.
Zertifiziert durch TV Saarland e.V. gem. DGRL 97/23/EG Anhang I, 4.3 Auditbericht Nr. 6020/06/0308
Certified by TV Saarland e.V. acc. to PED 97/23/CE Annex I, 4.3 Report No. 6020/06/0308.
Certifi par TV Saarland e.V. selon PED 97/23/CE Annexe I, 4.3 Report No. 6020/06/0308.
Daun, 20.05.08/bo
G. Kerpen, Werkssachverstndiger
Works Inspector/ Inspecteur de lusine
Abnahmeprfzeugnis
Inspection certificate / Certificat de rception
EN 10204
3.1
Industriegebiet - D54550 Daun - F.R.Germany

Telefon 06592/712-0 Fax 06592/712380 www.tpsd.de
Zeugnis - Nr.:
2008 - 8686
Blatt 2 von 2
Certificate - No.:
Document - No.:
Schmelzen-
Page
Page
Streckgrenze / limite
delasticit
Kurzzeichen
Los
Heat/Coule
Lot
Yield Strength
Zugfestigkeit Bruchdehnung
resistance a la alongement
traction
Tensile
Elongation
Strength
Rm
A5
Hrte
hardness
Rp 0,2
Rp 1,0
durete
Ident-No.
MPa
MPa
MPa
HRB
Anforderungen /
Requirements
205
240
515-690
40
80
of
de
Visuelle u. Makontrolle
OK
Visual & Dimensional Control

Dimensionnel & Visuel
Ringfaltversuch
OK
Flattening Test
Essai daplatissement
K 748
01
288
318
571
69
77
K 748
01
271
311
563
71
77
K 748
02
264
318
576
70
78
Aufweitversuch
K 748
02
281
314
568
68
77
Flaring Test
K 771
03
247
281
564
71
79
Essai devasment
K 771
03
262
321
575
68
80
K 771
04
253
282
565
70
79
Wirbelstromprfung
K 771
04
253
290
574
69
79
Eddy-Current Test
K 771
05
259
299
554
69
78
Essai courant de Foucault
K 771
05
246
291
565
70
80
K 748
06
294
323
577
82
77
Wasserdruckprfung
K 748
06
272
303
570
70
78
Hydrostatic Test
OK
A1016 / E 426
EN 10246-2
OK
80 bar Deionat
OK
Essai hydraulique
Ultraschallprfung
Ultrasonic Test
Essai aux ultrasons
Verwechslungsprfung
OK
Spectroscopic Test / Mix up control test

Epreuve spectroscopique de confusion
Chemische Analyse ( Gew. % )

Chemical Analysis (Weight %)
Analyse Chimique (Poids %)
Schmelzenkurzzeichen
C
Si
Heat /Coulee Ident-No.
Mn
Cr
Ni
Mo
Anforderungen
max.
max.
max.
max.
max.
16.50
11.00 -
2.00 -
max.
Requirements
0.030
0.75
2.00
0.040
0.015
18.00
12.50
2.40
0.11
K 748
0.022
0.28
1.59
0.030
0.002
16.55
11.20
2.03
0.07
264
K 771
0.017
0.21
1.68
0.031
0.005
16.85
11.10
2.02
0.05
224
pcs.
14
Electrical Certificates
Item Material
03
15
25
26
29
30
31
34
Pump motor
Vapour pressure analyser
Junction box (digital)
Light switch
Lighting
Certificate
Make
Type
CESI 05 ATEX 110X

TV 07 ATEX 553225 / TV 96 ATEX 1132 X
PTB 00 ATEX 1052
PTB 00 ATEX 1074
PTB 00 ATEX 1052 (see item 25)
PTB 98 ATEX 3121
PTB 96 ATEX 2144
PTB 99 ATEX 1162
Koncar
Bartec-Benke
Rose
Ceag
Rose
Ceag
Ceag
Ceag
5AT71A-2 IMB34
RVP-4
35151508
GHG 261 0005 R0009
35151508
GHG 273 2000 R0018
eLLK92018/18
GHG 635 1102 R0106
03
Koncar
Pump motor
5AT71A-2 IMB34
CESI 05 ATEX 110X
03
MarelliMotori
Pump motor
D6Y90L4
BVI 08 ATEX 0001
15
Bartec-Benke
Vapour pressure analyser

RVP-4
TV 07 ATEX 553225 / TV 96 ATEX 1132 X
25
Rose

35151508
PTB 00 ATEX 1052
26
Ceag

GHG 261 0005 R0009
PTB 00 ATEX 1074
30
Ceag
Light switch
GHG 273 2000 R0018
PTB 98 ATEX 3121
31
Ceag
Lighting
eLLK92018/18
PTB 96 ATEX 2144
Daten
Data
Caractristiques
Das Gehuse der Leuchte mit Leuchtstofflampen besteht aus glasfaserverstrktem Polyester mit einem
lichtdurchlssigen Teil aus Polycarbonat. Durch Bestckung mit einem Notlichtversorgungsgert und einem
Batteriekasten wird die Leuchte zu einer Sicherheitsleuchte. Der Batteriekasten wird wahlweise separat
oder stirnseitig an der Leuchte befestigt.
The enclosure of the fluorescent light fitting is made of reinforced polyester whilst its transparent cover is made
of polycarbonate. By adding an inverter for emergency light and a battery box, the luminaire is converted into a
safety luminaire. The battery box is either mounted separately or onto the narrow side of the luminaire.
Le luminaire pour lampes fluorescentes se compose d un botier en polyester arm aux fibres de verre et dune
vasque transparente en polycarbonate. En quipant le luminaire d un onduleur et dun coffret de batterie, il
est transform en un luminaire de scurit. Le coffret de batterie est, au choix, mont sparment ou sur le front
du luminaire.
Benennung
Type
Type
eLLK 92018/18
eLLK 92036
eLLK 92036/36
eLLK 92058
eLLK 92058/58
eLLK 92018/18 Ni
eLLK 92018/18 Ni
eLLK 92036/36 Ni
eLLK 92036/36 Ni
eLLM 92018/18
eLLM 92036/36
eLLM 92018/18 Ni
eLLM 92018/18 Ni
Elektrische Daten
Electrical data
Caractristiques lectriques
AC
DC
110V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V ... 230V10%
110V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V ... 230V10%
110V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V ... 230V10%
110V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V ... 230V10%
220V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
220V ... 230V10%
110V .. 127V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
220V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V .. 127V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
220V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V ... 230V10%
110V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
110V ... 230V10%
110V .. 127V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
220V .. 254V10% 47Hz ..63Hz
-
Kennzeichnung nach Richtlinie 94/9/EG

Marking acc. Directive 94/9/CE
Marquage selon Directive 94/9/EC
Schutzart nach EN 60 529 (IEC 529)
Protection acc. to EN 60 529 (IEC 529)
Indice de protection selon EN 60 529 (IEC 529)
Lampen / lamps / lampes
1 bzw 2 Leuchtstofflampen
1 or 2 fluorescent lamps
1 ou 2 lampes fluorescentes
II 2 G
50C
50C
50C
50C
40C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
EEx de IIC T4 bzw. EEx de ib IIC T4 bzw.

EEx dem ib IIC T4
IP 66
18 W nach (acc. / selon) 81 -IEC 1105 bzw (or

(or / ou.)
36 W nach (acc. / selon) 81 -IEC 1305 bzw (or / ou.)
58 W nach (acc. / selon) 81 -IEC 1545
Zustzliche Information zur Elektomagnetischen Vertrglichkeit:

Additional information on Electromagnetic compatibility:
Information supplmentaire concernant Compatibilit lectromagntique:
Besondere Bedingungen
Special requirements
Conditions spciales
Max.
Umgebungstemperatur
Max. ambient temperature
Temprature ambiante max.
keine
none
aucunes
siehe Betriebsanleitung
see operating instructions
voir manuel dinstruction
34
Ceag

GHG 635 1102 R0106
PTB 99 ATEX 1162

Databook12-9213 RVP-4 Section 8 To 14

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Databook12-9213 RVP-4 Section 8 To 14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

8

Interline Systems B.V.

Fast loop flowmeter

Fast loop flowmeter

Interline Systems B.V.

Tube Fittings - Installation Instructions

Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings

Fully insert the tubing into the

Mark the nut at the 6 oclock

While holding the fitting body

Installation in High-Pressure Applications and High Safety-Factor Systems

3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position.

Swagelok Tube Fittings Over 1 in./25 mm

1. Insert tubing with preswaged ferrules into the fitting body

3. Tighten slightly with a wrench (Fig. 2).

Caps and Plugs

See Swagelok tube

Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings

Machined Ferrule End

Tube Adapter End

While holding fitting body steady, tighten the port connector

1. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting.

Female pipe port

2. Insert the tube adapter into the

4. While holding fitting body steady,

O-Seal Male Connectors

Positionable Elbows and Tees

Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings

5. Complete the weld.

2. Turn a Swagelok tube fitting plug or another nut onto the

3. Provide a suitable heat sink to dissipate the heat.

Caution: When welding carbon steel fittings, the heat

Depth Marking Tool

1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred

3. While holding the fitting body

2. Remove the tubing from the DMT

1. Install the Swagelok nut and

3. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly

6. Loosen the nut.

4. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock

8. Insert tubing with preswaged

5. While holding the preswaging tool

9. Rotate the nut with a wrench to the

For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and

10. Tighten slightly with a wrench

Interline Systems B.V.

Test Record 24h

RVP 10.07.062 @ 45C

Interline Systems B.V.

Factory Acceptance Test

Interline Systems B.V.

(see item 01)

(see item 04)

(see item 01)

(see item 04)

(see item 25)

(see item 13)

O ne -Pie ce Instr ume ntation Ball Valve s

Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series

Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves

Swagelok one-piece instrumentation ball valves have been

40G Series and 40 Series Comparison

Flow Data at 70F (20C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5